NZ755273B2 - Virtual and augmented reality systems and methods - Google Patents
Virtual and augmented reality systems and methods Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- NZ755273B2 NZ755273B2 NZ755273A NZ75527314A NZ755273B2 NZ 755273 B2 NZ755273 B2 NZ 755273B2 NZ 755273 A NZ755273 A NZ 755273A NZ 75527314 A NZ75527314 A NZ 75527314A NZ 755273 B2 NZ755273 B2 NZ 755273B2
- Authority
- NZ
- New Zealand
- Prior art keywords
- light
- lens
- user
- waveguide
- eye
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title description 76
- 230000003190 augmentative effect Effects 0.000 title description 31
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 claims description 214
- 210000001747 pupil Anatomy 0.000 claims description 177
- GQYHUHYESMUTHG-UHFFFAOYSA-N lithium niobate Chemical compound [Li+].[O-][Nb](=O)=O GQYHUHYESMUTHG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 15
- 210000000695 crystalline len Anatomy 0.000 description 349
- 241000219739 Lens Species 0.000 description 331
- 210000001508 eye Anatomy 0.000 description 330
- 239000000835 fiber Substances 0.000 description 261
- 239000013307 optical fiber Substances 0.000 description 100
- 230000004308 accommodation Effects 0.000 description 85
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 73
- 230000000007 visual effect Effects 0.000 description 46
- 230000008447 perception Effects 0.000 description 42
- 239000011295 pitch Substances 0.000 description 40
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 37
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 description 35
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 description 34
- 238000003491 array Methods 0.000 description 33
- 210000003128 head Anatomy 0.000 description 33
- 125000001475 halogen functional group Chemical group 0.000 description 31
- 230000010287 polarization Effects 0.000 description 29
- 210000001525 retina Anatomy 0.000 description 28
- 238000009877 rendering Methods 0.000 description 27
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 24
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 24
- 230000000875 corresponding effect Effects 0.000 description 21
- 210000004556 brain Anatomy 0.000 description 20
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 19
- 238000005286 illumination Methods 0.000 description 18
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 17
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 17
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 description 17
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 16
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 14
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 14
- 230000002238 attenuated effect Effects 0.000 description 13
- 230000001965 increasing effect Effects 0.000 description 12
- 150000002500 ions Chemical class 0.000 description 12
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 12
- 210000004087 cornea Anatomy 0.000 description 11
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 11
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 10
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 10
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 10
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 10
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 9
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 8
- 238000005253 cladding Methods 0.000 description 8
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 8
- 210000000887 face Anatomy 0.000 description 8
- 238000012800 visualization Methods 0.000 description 8
- 239000004983 Polymer Dispersed Liquid Crystal Substances 0.000 description 7
- 238000002347 injection Methods 0.000 description 7
- 239000007924 injection Substances 0.000 description 7
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 7
- 239000012528 membrane Substances 0.000 description 7
- 238000011282 treatment Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 6
- 239000011263 electroactive material Substances 0.000 description 6
- 239000010408 film Substances 0.000 description 6
- AMGQUBHHOARCQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium;oxotin Chemical compound [In].[Sn]=O AMGQUBHHOARCQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 6
- 241000282412 Homo Species 0.000 description 5
- 230000004075 alteration Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000001934 delay Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000013507 mapping Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000000873 masking effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 108091008695 photoreceptors Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000001902 propagating effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000003098 cholesteric effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000001886 ciliary effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000001427 coherent effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000002131 composite material Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000001914 filtration Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000003534 oscillatory effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000005855 radiation Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000002123 temporal effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 description 4
- OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon Chemical compound [C] OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 206010025421 Macule Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 239000000654 additive Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000000996 additive effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000035559 beat frequency Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000013013 elastic material Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 239000010409 thin film Substances 0.000 description 3
- KRQUFUKTQHISJB-YYADALCUSA-N 2-[(E)-N-[2-(4-chlorophenoxy)propoxy]-C-propylcarbonimidoyl]-3-hydroxy-5-(thian-3-yl)cyclohex-2-en-1-one Chemical compound CCC\C(=N/OCC(C)OC1=CC=C(Cl)C=C1)C1=C(O)CC(CC1=O)C1CCCSC1 KRQUFUKTQHISJB-YYADALCUSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 201000004569 Blindness Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 240000000233 Melia azedarach Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000158147 Sator Species 0.000 description 2
- 230000004931 aggregating effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000002776 aggregation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000004220 aggregation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000003416 augmentation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000001276 controlling effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000005520 cutting process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000001419 dependent effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000006185 dispersion Substances 0.000 description 2
- 210000000613 ear canal Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 238000005530 etching Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000012530 fluid Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910021389 graphene Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 238000002156 mixing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 2
- 210000003205 muscle Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 230000002688 persistence Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229940125730 polarisation modulator Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 238000005498 polishing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000004886 process control Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000004064 recycling Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000011514 reflex Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000001228 spectrum Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000000638 stimulation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000010408 sweeping Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000011144 upstream manufacturing Methods 0.000 description 2
- XUKUURHRXDUEBC-KAYWLYCHSA-N Atorvastatin Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1C1=C(C=2C=CC(F)=CC=2)N(CC[C@@H](O)C[C@@H](O)CC(O)=O)C(C(C)C)=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=CC=C1 XUKUURHRXDUEBC-KAYWLYCHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 240000001546 Byrsonima crassifolia Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000003197 Byrsonima crassifolia Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000004986 Cholesteric liquid crystals (ChLC) Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004593 Epoxy Substances 0.000 description 1
- 244000228957 Ferula foetida Species 0.000 description 1
- 244000153665 Ficus glomerata Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000012571 Ficus glomerata Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 206010019233 Headaches Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 241001527806 Iti Species 0.000 description 1
- 229920001410 Microfiber Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 101100400378 Mus musculus Marveld2 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- RAQQRQCODVNJCK-JLHYYAGUSA-N N-[(4-amino-2-methylpyrimidin-5-yl)methyl]-N-[(E)-5-hydroxy-3-(2-hydroxyethyldisulfanyl)pent-2-en-2-yl]formamide Chemical compound C\C(N(Cc1cnc(C)nc1N)C=O)=C(\CCO)SSCCO RAQQRQCODVNJCK-JLHYYAGUSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004988 Nematic liquid crystal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 206010033799 Paralysis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 241000270295 Serpentes Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000015125 Sterculia urens Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000011149 active material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000853 adhesive Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001070 adhesive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000000712 assembly Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000429 assembly Methods 0.000 description 1
- 208000003464 asthenopia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000004888 barrier function Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011324 bead Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000006399 behavior Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004364 calculation method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002041 carbon nanotube Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910021393 carbon nanotube Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 210000003161 choroid Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000002642 cobra venom Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001447 compensatory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002591 computed tomography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012937 correction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002596 correlated effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000004122 cyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000013500 data storage Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003989 dielectric material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000006073 displacement reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000009977 dual effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000005069 ears Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000004424 eye movement Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004438 eyesight Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002349 favourable effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000005262 ferroelectric liquid crystals (FLCs) Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000004886 head movement Effects 0.000 description 1
- 231100000869 headache Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 238000003384 imaging method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001976 improved effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001939 inductive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002452 interceptive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 1
- FOXFZRUHNHCZPX-UHFFFAOYSA-N metribuzin Chemical compound CSC1=NN=C(C(C)(C)C)C(=O)N1N FOXFZRUHNHCZPX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000003658 microfiber Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000004459 microsaccades Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008450 motivation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005405 multipole Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007433 nerve pathway Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007935 neutral effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010428 oil painting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000001328 optic nerve Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000005457 optimization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012856 packing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003973 paint Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002245 particle Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000737 periodic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000049 pigment Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004321 preservation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000644 propagated effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002310 reflectometry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000717 retained effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002207 retinal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004256 retinal image Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005096 rolling process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005488 sandblasting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000003786 sclera Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000012163 sequencing technique Methods 0.000 description 1
- KISFEBPWFCGRGN-UHFFFAOYSA-M sodium;2-(2,4-dichlorophenoxy)ethyl sulfate Chemical compound [Na+].[O-]S(=O)(=O)OCCOC1=CC=C(Cl)C=C1Cl KISFEBPWFCGRGN-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000005236 sound signal Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000007921 spray Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000005507 spraying Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001131 transforming effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000032258 transport Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002435 venom Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000001048 venom Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 231100000611 venom Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 230000004470 vergence movement Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004462 vestibulo-ocular reflex Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000016776 visual perception Effects 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B17/00—Systems with reflecting surfaces, with or without refracting elements
- G02B17/08—Catadioptric systems
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B2006/0098—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings for scanning
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B27/00—Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
- G02B27/01—Head-up displays
- G02B27/0101—Head-up displays characterised by optical features
- G02B2027/0118—Head-up displays characterised by optical features comprising devices for improving the contrast of the display / brillance control visibility
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B27/00—Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
- G02B27/01—Head-up displays
- G02B27/0101—Head-up displays characterised by optical features
- G02B2027/0123—Head-up displays characterised by optical features comprising devices increasing the field of view
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B27/00—Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
- G02B27/01—Head-up displays
- G02B27/0101—Head-up displays characterised by optical features
- G02B2027/0123—Head-up displays characterised by optical features comprising devices increasing the field of view
- G02B2027/0125—Field-of-view increase by wavefront division
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B27/00—Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
- G02B27/01—Head-up displays
- G02B27/0101—Head-up displays characterised by optical features
- G02B2027/0132—Head-up displays characterised by optical features comprising binocular systems
- G02B2027/0134—Head-up displays characterised by optical features comprising binocular systems of stereoscopic type
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B27/00—Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
- G02B27/01—Head-up displays
- G02B27/0101—Head-up displays characterised by optical features
- G02B2027/0138—Head-up displays characterised by optical features comprising image capture systems, e.g. camera
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B27/00—Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
- G02B27/01—Head-up displays
- G02B27/0101—Head-up displays characterised by optical features
- G02B2027/014—Head-up displays characterised by optical features comprising information/image processing systems
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B27/00—Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
- G02B27/01—Head-up displays
- G02B27/0149—Head-up displays characterised by mechanical features
- G02B2027/0161—Head-up displays characterised by mechanical features characterised by the relative positioning of the constitutive elements
- G02B2027/0163—Electric or electronic control thereof
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B27/00—Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
- G02B27/01—Head-up displays
- G02B27/017—Head mounted
- G02B2027/0178—Eyeglass type
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B26/00—Optical devices or arrangements for the control of light using movable or deformable optical elements
- G02B26/08—Optical devices or arrangements for the control of light using movable or deformable optical elements for controlling the direction of light
- G02B26/0808—Optical devices or arrangements for the control of light using movable or deformable optical elements for controlling the direction of light by means of one or more diffracting elements
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B27/00—Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
- G02B27/0087—Phased arrays
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B27/00—Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
- G02B27/0093—Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00 with means for monitoring data relating to the user, e.g. head-tracking, eye-tracking
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B27/00—Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
- G02B27/01—Head-up displays
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B27/00—Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
- G02B27/01—Head-up displays
- G02B27/017—Head mounted
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B27/00—Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
- G02B27/01—Head-up displays
- G02B27/017—Head mounted
- G02B27/0172—Head mounted characterised by optical features
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B27/00—Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
- G02B27/01—Head-up displays
- G02B27/017—Head mounted
- G02B27/0176—Head mounted characterised by mechanical features
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B27/00—Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
- G02B27/42—Diffraction optics, i.e. systems including a diffractive element being designed for providing a diffractive effect
- G02B27/4205—Diffraction optics, i.e. systems including a diffractive element being designed for providing a diffractive effect having a diffractive optical element [DOE] contributing to image formation, e.g. whereby modulation transfer function MTF or optical aberrations are relevant
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B3/00—Simple or compound lenses
- G02B3/0006—Arrays
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B3/00—Simple or compound lenses
- G02B3/0006—Arrays
- G02B3/0037—Arrays characterized by the distribution or form of lenses
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B30/00—Optical systems or apparatus for producing three-dimensional [3D] effects, e.g. stereoscopic images
- G02B30/20—Optical systems or apparatus for producing three-dimensional [3D] effects, e.g. stereoscopic images by providing first and second parallax images to an observer's left and right eyes
- G02B30/22—Optical systems or apparatus for producing three-dimensional [3D] effects, e.g. stereoscopic images by providing first and second parallax images to an observer's left and right eyes of the stereoscopic type
- G02B30/24—Optical systems or apparatus for producing three-dimensional [3D] effects, e.g. stereoscopic images by providing first and second parallax images to an observer's left and right eyes of the stereoscopic type involving temporal multiplexing, e.g. using sequentially activated left and right shutters
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B5/00—Optical elements other than lenses
- G02B5/005—Diaphragms
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B5/00—Optical elements other than lenses
- G02B5/18—Diffraction gratings
- G02B5/1814—Diffraction gratings structurally combined with one or more further optical elements, e.g. lenses, mirrors, prisms or other diffraction gratings
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B5/00—Optical elements other than lenses
- G02B5/18—Diffraction gratings
- G02B5/1828—Diffraction gratings having means for producing variable diffraction
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B5/00—Optical elements other than lenses
- G02B5/20—Filters
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B6/02—Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating
- G02B6/02042—Multicore optical fibres
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B6/04—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings formed by bundles of fibres
- G02B6/06—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings formed by bundles of fibres the relative position of the fibres being the same at both ends, e.g. for transporting images
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B6/24—Coupling light guides
- G02B6/26—Optical coupling means
- G02B6/32—Optical coupling means having lens focusing means positioned between opposed fibre ends
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B6/24—Coupling light guides
- G02B6/26—Optical coupling means
- G02B6/34—Optical coupling means utilising prism or grating
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B6/24—Coupling light guides
- G02B6/36—Mechanical coupling means
- G02B6/40—Mechanical coupling means having fibre bundle mating means
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
- G02C2202/00—Generic optical aspects applicable to one or more of the subgroups of G02C7/00
- G02C2202/16—Laminated or compound lenses
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
- G02C7/00—Optical parts
- G02C7/02—Lenses; Lens systems ; Methods of designing lenses
- G02C7/04—Contact lenses for the eyes
- G02C7/049—Contact lenses having special fitting or structural features achieved by special materials or material structures
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02C—SPECTACLES; SUNGLASSES OR GOGGLES INSOFAR AS THEY HAVE THE SAME FEATURES AS SPECTACLES; CONTACT LENSES
- G02C7/00—Optical parts
- G02C7/10—Filters, e.g. for facilitating adaptation of the eyes to the dark; Sunglasses
- G02C7/104—Filters, e.g. for facilitating adaptation of the eyes to the dark; Sunglasses having spectral characteristics for purposes other than sun-protection
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colourÂ
- G02F1/0102—Constructional details, not otherwise provided for in this subclass
- G02F1/0105—Illuminating devices
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colourÂ
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/1333—Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
- G02F1/1334—Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods based on polymer dispersed liquid crystals, e.g. microencapsulated liquid crystals
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colourÂ
- G02F1/17—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on variable-absorption elements not provided for in groups G02F1/015 - G02F1/169
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/29—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the position or the direction of light beams, i.e. deflection
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/29—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the position or the direction of light beams, i.e. deflection
- G02F1/292—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the position or the direction of light beams, i.e. deflection by controlled diffraction or phased-array beam steering
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/29—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the position or the direction of light beams, i.e. deflection
- G02F1/294—Variable focal length devices
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/29—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the position or the direction of light beams, i.e. deflection
- G02F1/31—Digital deflection, i.e. optical switching
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
- G06F3/011—Arrangements for interaction with the human body, e.g. for user immersion in virtual reality
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
- G06F3/011—Arrangements for interaction with the human body, e.g. for user immersion in virtual reality
- G06F3/013—Eye tracking input arrangements
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
- G06F3/017—Gesture based interaction, e.g. based on a set of recognized hand gestures
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/14—Digital output to display device ; Cooperation and interconnection of the display device with other functional units
- G06F3/1423—Digital output to display device ; Cooperation and interconnection of the display device with other functional units controlling a plurality of local displays, e.g. CRT and flat panel display
-
- G06K9/0061—
-
- G06K9/52—
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06T—IMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
- G06T13/00—Animation
- G06T13/20—3D [Three Dimensional] animation
- G06T13/40—3D [Three Dimensional] animation of characters, e.g. humans, animals or virtual beings
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06T—IMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
- G06T15/00—3D [Three Dimensional] image rendering
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06T—IMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
- G06T15/00—3D [Three Dimensional] image rendering
- G06T15/10—Geometric effects
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06T—IMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
- G06T15/00—3D [Three Dimensional] image rendering
- G06T15/50—Lighting effects
- G06T15/506—Illumination models
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06T—IMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
- G06T17/00—Three dimensional [3D] modelling, e.g. data description of 3D objects
- G06T17/10—Constructive solid geometry [CSG] using solid primitives, e.g. cylinders, cubes
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06T—IMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
- G06T19/00—Manipulating 3D models or images for computer graphics
- G06T19/003—Navigation within 3D models or images
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06T—IMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
- G06T19/00—Manipulating 3D models or images for computer graphics
- G06T19/006—Mixed reality
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06T—IMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
- G06T19/00—Manipulating 3D models or images for computer graphics
- G06T19/20—Editing of 3D images, e.g. changing shapes or colours, aligning objects or positioning parts
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06T—IMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
- G06T2207/00—Indexing scheme for image analysis or image enhancement
- G06T2207/10—Image acquisition modality
- G06T2207/10016—Video; Image sequence
- G06T2207/10021—Stereoscopic video; Stereoscopic image sequence
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06T—IMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
- G06T2207/00—Indexing scheme for image analysis or image enhancement
- G06T2207/30—Subject of image; Context of image processing
- G06T2207/30196—Human being; Person
- G06T2207/30201—Face
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06T—IMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
- G06T2213/00—Indexing scheme for animation
- G06T2213/08—Animation software package
-
- G06T5/002—
-
- G06T5/003—
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06T—IMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
- G06T5/00—Image enhancement or restoration
- G06T5/50—Image enhancement or restoration using two or more images, e.g. averaging or subtraction
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06T—IMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
- G06T7/00—Image analysis
- G06T7/50—Depth or shape recovery
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06T—IMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
- G06T7/00—Image analysis
- G06T7/70—Determining position or orientation of objects or cameras
- G06T7/73—Determining position or orientation of objects or cameras using feature-based methods
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G5/00—Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators
- G09G5/003—Details of a display terminal, the details relating to the control arrangement of the display terminal and to the interfaces thereto
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G5/00—Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators
- G09G5/02—Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators characterised by the way in which colour is displayed
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G5/00—Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators
- G09G5/10—Intensity circuits
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G5/00—Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators
- G09G5/18—Timing circuits for raster scan displays
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/10—Processing, recording or transmission of stereoscopic or multi-view image signals
- H04N13/106—Processing image signals
- H04N13/111—Transformation of image signals corresponding to virtual viewpoints, e.g. spatial image interpolation
- H04N13/117—Transformation of image signals corresponding to virtual viewpoints, e.g. spatial image interpolation the virtual viewpoint locations being selected by the viewers or determined by viewer tracking
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/20—Image signal generators
- H04N13/204—Image signal generators using stereoscopic image cameras
- H04N13/239—Image signal generators using stereoscopic image cameras using two 2D image sensors having a relative position equal to or related to the interocular distance
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/20—Image signal generators
- H04N13/286—Image signal generators having separate monoscopic and stereoscopic modes
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/332—Displays for viewing with the aid of special glasses or head-mounted displays [HMD]
- H04N13/341—Displays for viewing with the aid of special glasses or head-mounted displays [HMD] using temporal multiplexing
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/332—Displays for viewing with the aid of special glasses or head-mounted displays [HMD]
- H04N13/344—Displays for viewing with the aid of special glasses or head-mounted displays [HMD] with head-mounted left-right displays
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/361—Reproducing mixed stereoscopic images; Reproducing mixed monoscopic and stereoscopic images, e.g. a stereoscopic image overlay window on a monoscopic image background
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/363—Image reproducers using image projection screens
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/366—Image reproducers using viewer tracking
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/366—Image reproducers using viewer tracking
- H04N13/383—Image reproducers using viewer tracking for tracking with gaze detection, i.e. detecting the lines of sight of the viewer's eyes
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N2013/0074—Stereoscopic image analysis
- H04N2013/0085—Motion estimation from stereoscopic image signals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N5/00—Details of television systems
- H04N5/14—Picture signal circuitry for video frequency region
- H04N5/21—Circuitry for suppressing or minimising disturbance, e.g. moirĂ© or halo
-
- H04N5/225—
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N5/00—Details of television systems
- H04N5/74—Projection arrangements for image reproduction, e.g. using eidophor
Abstract
Disclosed is a system for displaying content to a user. The system includes a light source configured to project light associated with at least first and second frames of image data and a waveguide assembly configured to relay the projected light towards at least one eye of a user with a wavefront curvature for a focus level corresponding to a focal distance for the respective first or second frame of image data. The waveguide assembly comprises a first waveguide component operatively coupled to a first weak lens to modify first light associated with the first frame of image data such that the first light is perceived as coming from a first focal plane and a second waveguide component. The first waveguide component and the second waveguide component sandwich the first weak lens and are stacked along a z-axis in front of the at least one eye of the user. urvature for a focus level corresponding to a focal distance for the respective first or second frame of image data. The waveguide assembly comprises a first waveguide component operatively coupled to a first weak lens to modify first light associated with the first frame of image data such that the first light is perceived as coming from a first focal plane and a second waveguide component. The first waveguide component and the second waveguide component sandwich the first weak lens and are stacked along a z-axis in front of the at least one eye of the user.
Description
VIRTUAL AND AUGMENTED Y SYSTEMS AND METHODS
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The present sure relates to virtual reality and ted y imaging and
visualization systems.
BACKGROUND
Modern computing and display technologies have facilitated the development of
systems for so called “virtual reality” or nted reality” experiences, wherein digitally
reproduced images or portions thereof are presented to a user in a manner wherein they seem
to be, or may be perceived as, real. A virtual reality, or “VR”, scenario typically involves
presentation of digital or virtual image information without transparency to other actual real-
world visual input; an augmented reality, or “AR”, scenario lly involves presentation of
digital or virtual image information as an augmentation to visualization of the actual world
around the user. For example, referring to Figure 1, an augmented reality scene (4) is depicted
wherein a user of an AR technology sees a real-world park-like setting (6) featuring people,
trees, ngs in the background, and a te platform (1120). In on to these items,
the user of the AR technology also perceives that he “sees” a robot statue (1110) standing
upon the real-world platform (1120), and a cartoon-like avatar character (2) flying by which
seems to be a ification of a bumble bee, even though these elements (2, 1110) do not
exist in the real world. As it turns out, the human visual perception system is very complex, and
producing a VR or AR technology that facilitates a comfortable, natural-feeling, rich
presentation of virtual image elements amongst other virtual or real-world imagery ts is
challenging.
Referring to Figure 2A, stereoscopic wearable glasses (8) type configurations have
been developed which generally feature two displays (10, 12) that are configured to display
images with slightly different element presentation such that a three-dimensional perspective is
perceived by the human visual system. Such configurations have been found to be
uncomfortable for many users due to a mismatch between vergence and accommodation which
must be overcome to perceive the images in three dimensions; indeed, some users are not
able to te stereoscopic configurations. Figure 2B shows another stereoscopic wearable
glasses (14) type configuration ing two forward-oriented cameras (16, 18) ured to
capture images for an augmented reality presentation to the user through stereoscopic
displays. The position of the cameras (16, 18) and displays lly blocks the natural field of
view of the user when the glasses (14) are mounted on the user’s head.
ing to Figure 2C, an augmented reality configuration (20) is shown which
features a visualization module (26) d to a glasses frame (24) which also holds
conventional glasses lenses (22). The user is able to see an at least partially unobstructed
view of the real world with such a system, and has a small display (28) with which l
imagery may be presented in an AR configuration to one eye — for a monocular AR
presentation. Figure 2D features a uration wherein a visualization module (32) may be
coupled to a hat or helmet (30) and configured to present monocular augmented digital y
to a user through a small display (34). Figure 2E illustrates another similar configuration
wherein a frame (36) couple-able to a user’s head in a manner similar to an eyeglasses
coupling so that a visualization module (38) may be utilized to capture images and also present
monocular augmented digital imagery to a user through a small display (40). Such a
configuration is available, for example, from Google, Inc, of Mountain View, CA under the trade
name GoogleGlass (RTM). None of these configurations is optimally suited for presenting a
rich, lar, three-dimensional augmented reality experience in a manner that will be
comfortable and maximally useful to the user, in part because prior systems fail to address
some of the fundamental aspects of the human perception system, including the
photoreceptors of the retina and their interoperation with the brain to e the perception of
ization to the user.
Referring to Figure 3, a simplified cross-sectional view of a human eye is depicted
ing a cornea (42), iris (44), lens — or “crystalline lens” (46), sclera (48), choroid layer (50),
macula (52), retina (54), and optic nerve pathway (56) to the brain. The macula is the center of
the retina, which is utilized to see moderate ; at the center of the macula is a portion of
the retina that is referred to as the “fovea”, which is utilized for seeing the finest details, and
which contains more eceptors (approximately 120 cones per visual degree) than any
other portion of the retina. The human visual system is not a passive sensor type of system; it
is configured to actively scan the environment. In a manner somewhat akin to use of a flatbed
scanner to capture an image, or use of a finger to read Braille from a paper, the photoreceptors
of the eye fire in response to changes in stimulation, rather than constantly responding to a
constant state of stimulation. Thus motion is required to present photoreceptor information to
the brain (as is motion of the linear scanner array across a piece of paper in a flatbed scanner,
or motion of a finger across a word of Braille imprinted into a paper). Indeed, ments with
substances such as cobra venom, which has been utilized to paralyze the muscles of the eye,
have shown that a human subject will experience blindness if positioned with his eyes open,
viewing a static scene with venom-induced paralysis of the eyes. In other words, without
changes in ation, the photoreceptors do not provide input to the brain and blindness is
experienced. It is believed that this is at least one reason that the eyes of normal humans have
been observed to move back and forth, or dither, in side-to-side motion in what are called
“microsaccades”.
As noted above, the fovea of the retina contains the greatest density of
photoreceptors, and while humans typically have the tion that they have high-resolution
visualization capabilities throughout their field of view, they generally actually have only a small
high-resolution center that they are mechanically sweeping around a lot, along with a tent
memory of the high-resolution information recently captured with the fovea. In a somewhat
similar , the focal distance control mechanism of the eye (ciliary muscles operatively
coupled to the crystalline lens in a manner wherein ciliary relaxation causes taut ciliary
connective fibers to flatten out the lens for more distant focal lengths; y ction causes
loose ciliary connective fibers, which allow the lens to assume a more rounded geometry for
more close-in focal lengths) dithers back and forth by approximately 1A to 1/2 diopter to cyclically
induce a small amount of what is called “dioptric blur” on both the close side and far side of the
targeted focal length; this is utilized by the accommodation control circuits of the brain as
cyclical negative feedback that helps to constantly correct course and keep the retinal image of
a fixated object approximately in focus.
The visualization center of the brain also gains valuable perception information from
the motion of both eyes and components f ve to each other. Vergence movements
(i.e., rolling movements of the pupils toward or away from each other to converge the lines of
sight of the eyes to fixate upon an object) of the two eyes ve to each other are closely
associated with ng (or “accommodation”) of the lenses of the eyes. Under normal
conditions, ng the focus of the lenses of the eyes, or accommodating the eyes, to focus
upon an object at a ent distance will automatically cause a matching change in vergence
to the same distance, under a relationship known as the modation-vergence reflex.”
Likewise, a change in vergence will trigger a matching change in accommodation, under normal
conditions. Working against this reflex, as do most conventional stereoscopic AR or VR
configurations, is known to produce eye fatigue, headaches, or other forms of discomfort in
users.
Movement of the head, which houses the eyes, also has a key impact upon
visualization of objects. Humans move their heads to visualize the world around them; they
often are in a fairly constant state of repositioning and nting the head relative to an object
of interest. Further, most people prefer to move their heads when their eye gaze needs to
move more than about 20 degrees off center to focus on a particular object (i.e., people do not
typically like to look at things “from the corner of the eye”). Humans also typically scan or move
their heads in relation to sounds — to improve audio signal capture and utilize the geometry of
the ears ve to the head. The human visual system gains powerful depth cues from what is
called “head motion parallax”, which is related to the relative motion of objects at different
distances as a function of head motion and eye ce distance (i.e., if a person moves his
head from side to side and maintains fixation on an object, items farther out from that object will
move in the same direction as the head; items in front of that object will move opposite the
head motion; these are very t cues for where things are spatially in the environment
relative to the person — perhaps as powerful as stereopsis). Head motion also is utilized to look
around objects, of course.
Further, head and eye motion are coordinated with something called the bulo-
ocular ”, which stabilizes image information relative to the retina during head rotations,
thus keeping the object image information approximately ed on the . In response to
a head rotation, the eyes are reflexively and proportionately rotated in the opposite direction to
maintain stable fixation on an object. As a result of this compensatory relationship, many
humans can read a book while shaking their head back and forth (interestingly, if the book is
panned back and forth at the same speed with the head approximately stationary, the same
generally is not true — the person is not likely to be able to read the moving book; the vestibuloocular
reflex is one of head and eye motion coordination, generally not developed for hand
). This paradigm may be important for augmented reality systems, because head
motions of the user may be ated relatively directly with eye motions, and the system
preferably will be ready to work with this relationship.
Indeed, given these various relationships, when placing digital t (e.g., 3-D
t such as a virtual chandelier object presented to augment a real-world view of a room;
or 2-D content such as a planar/flat virtual oil painting object presented to augment a real-world
view of a room), design choices may be made to control behavior of the objects. For example,
the 2-D oil painting object may be head-centric, in which case the object moves around along
with the user’s head (e.g., as in a GoogleGlass approach); or the object may be world-centric,
in which case it may be presented as though it is part of the real world coordinate system, so
that the user may move his head or eyes t moving the position of the object relative to
the real world.
Thus when placing virtual content into the augmented y world presented with
an augmented reality system, whether the object should be presented as world centric (i.e., the
virtual object stays in position in the real world so that the user may move his body, head, eyes
around it t changing its position relative to the real world objects nding it, such as a
real world wall); body, or torso, centric, in which case a virtual element may be fixed relative to
the user’s torso, so that the user can move his head or eyes without moving the object, but that
is slaved to torso movements; head c, in which case the displayed object r display
itself) may be moved along with head movements, as described above in reference to
GoogleGlass; or eye centric, as in a “foveated display” configuration, as is described below,
n content is slewed around as a function of what the eye position is.
With world-centric configurations, it may be desirable to have inputs such as
accurate head pose measurement, accurate representation and/or measurement of real world
objects and geometries around the user, low-latency dynamic rendering in the ted
reality display as a function of head pose, and a generally low-latency display.
The systems and techniques described herein are configured to work with the visual
configuration of the typical human to address these challenges.
SUMMARY
Embodiments of the present invention are directed to devices, systems and methods
for facilitating virtual reality and/or augmented reality interaction for one or more users. In one
aspect, a system for displaying virtual t is disclosed.
In one or more embodiments, the system ses a light source to multiplex one
or more light patterns associated with one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential
manner; and an array of reflectors to receive the one or more light patterns and variably
converge light on an exit pupil.
In one or more embodiment, the system comprises an image-generating source to
provide one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential manner, a light modulator
configured to transmit light associated with the one or more frames of image data, a substrate
to direct image information to a user’s eye, wherein the substrate houses a plurality of
reflectors, a first tor of the plurality of tors to reflect light associated with a first frame
of image data at a first angle to the user’s eye, and a second reflector of the plurality of
reflectors to reflect light associated with a second frame of image data at a second angle to the
user’s eye.
The angle of reflection of the plurality of reflectors may be variable in one or more
embodiments. The reflectors may be switchable in one or more embodiments. The plurality of
reflectors may be electro-optically active in one or more ments. A refractive index of the
plurality of reflectors may be varied to match a refractive index of the substrate in one or more
embodiments. In an optional embodiment, the system may also comprise a high-frequency
gating layer configurable to be placed in between the substrate and the user’s eye, the highfrequency
gating layer having an aperture that is controllably movable. The re of the
high-frequency gating layer may be moved in a manner such that image data is selectively
transmitted only through the light that is reflected through the aperture in one or more
embodiments. One or more reflectors of the transmissive beamsplitter substrate may be
blocked by the high-frequency gating layer. The re may be an LCD aperture in one or
more embodiments. The aperture may be a MEMs array in one or more embodiments. The
first angle may be the same as the second angle in one or more embodiments. The first angle
may be different than the second angle in one or more ments.
In one or more embodiments, the system may r comprise a first lens to steer
a set of light rays through a nodal point and to the user’s eye. The first lens may be
urable to be placed on the substrate and in front of the first reflector such that the set of
light rays g the reflector pass through the first lens before reaching the user’s eye in one
or more embodiments.
The system may further comprise a second lens to compensate for the first lens,
the second lens configurable to be placed on the ate and on a side opposite to the side
on which the first lens is placed, thereby resulting in zero magnification, in one or more
embodiments.
The first reflector of the plurality of reflectors may be a curved reflective surface to
collect a set of light rays associated with the image data into a single output point before being
delivered to the user’s eye in one or more embodiments. The curved reflector may a parabolic
reflector in one or more ments. The curved reflector may be an elliptical reflector in one
or more embodiments.
In another embodiment, a method for displaying virtual content comprises providing
one or more light patterns associated with one or more frames of image data in a time-
sequential manner and reflecting the one or more light patterns associated with the one or
more frames of image data via a transmissive litter to an exit pupil, the issive
beamsplitter having a plurality of reflectors to variably converge on the exit pupil.
The angle of reflection of the plurality of reflectors may be variable in one or more
embodiments. The tors may be switchable in one or more embodiments. The plurality of
reflectors may be electro-optically active in one or more embodiments. A refractive index of the
plurality of reflectors may be varied to match a refractive index of the substrate in one or more
embodiments. In an optional embodiment, the system may also comprise a high-frequency
gating layer configurable to be placed in between the substrate and the user’s eye, the highfrequency
gating layer having an aperture that is llably e. The aperture of the
high-frequency gating layer may be moved in a manner such that image data is selectively
transmitted only through the light that is reflected through the aperture in one or more
ments. One or more reflectors of the transmissive beamsplitter substrate may be
blocked by the high-frequency gating layer. The aperture may be an LCD aperture in one or
more embodiments. The aperture may be a MEMs array in one or more embodiments. The
first angle may be the same as the second angle in one or more embodiments. The first angle
may be different than the second angle in one or more embodiments.
In one or more embodiments, the system may further comprise a first lens to steer
a set of light rays through a nodal point and to the user’s eye. The first lens may be
configurable to be placed on the substrate and in front of the first reflector such that the set of
light rays exiting the reflector pass through the first lens before reaching the user’s eye in one
or more embodiments.
The system may further se a second lens to compensate for the first lens,
the second lens configurable to be placed on the ate and on a side opposite to the side
on which the first lens is placed, y resulting in zero magnification, in one or more
ments.
The first reflector of the plurality of reflectors may be a curved reflective surface to
collect a set of light rays associated with the image data into a single output point before being
delivered to the user’s eye in one or more embodiments. The curved reflector may a parabolic
reflector in one or more embodiments. The curved reflector may be an elliptical reflector in one
or more embodiments.
In one or more embodiments, the wavefront may be collimated. In one or more
embodiments, the wavefront may be curved. The collimated wavefront may be perceived as an
ty depth plane, in some embodiments. The curved wavefront may be perceived as a depth
plane closer than optical infinity, in some embodiments.
In another ment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user, comprises
a light source to multiplex one or more light patterns ated with one or more frames of
image data in a time-sequential , an array of reflectors to receive the one or more light
patterns, the array of reflectors oriented at a particular angle, and a plurality of optical ts
coupled to the array of reflectors to variably converge the light patterns on an exit pupil.
In one or more embodiments, the array of reflectors may be separate from the
optical elements, in one or more embodiments. The array of reflectors may comprise flat
mirrors, in one or more embodiments. The optical elements may be lenslets coupled to the
array of reflectors, in one or more embodiments. The one or more reflectors of the array of
tors may be curved, in one or more embodiments. The optical ts may be
integrated into the array of reflectors. The plurality of optical elements may expand an exit
pupil, in one or more embodiments.
The system may further comprise a first lens to steer a set of light rays through a
nodal point and to the user’s eye, wherein the first lens is configurable to be placed on the
substrate and in front of the first reflector such that the set of light rays exiting the tor
pass through the first lens before reaching the user’s eye, in one or more embodiments.
The system may further comprise a second lens to compensate for the first lens,
the second lens configurable to be placed on the substrate and on a side opposite to the side
on which the first lens is placed, thereby resulting in zero magnification, in one or more
ments. The plurality of reflectors may comprise wavelength-selective tors, in one
or more embodiments. The plurality of tors may comprise half-silvered mirrors, in one or
more embodiments. The plurality of optical elements may comprise refractive lenses. The
plurality of optical elements may comprise diffractive lenses, in one or more embodiments. The
curved reflectors may se wave-length selective notch filters, in one or more
embodiments.
In another embodiment, a method for ying virtual content to a user comprises
providing one or more light patterns associated with one or more frames of image data in a
time-sequential manner, reflecting the one or more light patterns associated with the one or
more frames of image data via a transmissive beamsplitter to an exit pupil, the transmissive
beamsplitter having a plurality of reflectors to variably converge on the exit pupil, and
expanding an exit pupil through a plurality of optical elements coupled to the plurality of
reflectors of the issive litter.
In one or more embodiments, the array of tors may be separate from the
optical elements. In one or more embodiments the array of reflectors comprise flat mirrors.
The optical elements may be lenslets coupled to the array of reflectors, in one or more
embodiments.
In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user, comprises
a light source to multiplex one or more light ns associated with one or more frames of
image data in a time-sequential manner, and a waveguide to receive the one or more light
patterns and converge the light patterns to a first focus, and a le focus element (VFE)
coupled to the waveguide to converge at least some of the light ns to a second focus.
In one or more embodiments, the VFE is telecentric, in one or more embodiments.
The VFE is non-telecentric, in one or more embodiments. The system further comprises a
compensating lens such that the user’s view of the outside world is undistorted, in one or more
embodiments. The plurality of frames are presented to the user at a high frequency such that
the user perceives the frames as part of a single nt scene, wherein the VFE varies the
focus from a first frame to a second frame, in one or more embodiments. The light source is a
scanned light display, and wherein the VFE varies the focus in a line-by-line manner, in one or
more embodiments. The light source is a scanned light display, and n the VFE varies
the focus in a pixel-by—pixel , in one or more embodiments.
The VFE is a diffractive lens, in one or more embodiments. The VFE is a refractive
lens, in one or more ments. The VFE is a reflective mirror, in one or more
embodiments. The reflective mirror is opaque, in one or more embodiments. The tive
mirror is partially reflective, in one or more embodiments. The system further comprises an
accommodation module to track an accommodation of a user’s eyes, wherein the VFE varies
the focus of the light patterns based at least in part on the accommodation of the user’s eyes,
in one or more embodiments.
In yet another embodiment, system for displaying virtual content to a user,
ses a light source to multiplex one or more light patterns associated with one or more
frames of image data in a time-sequential manner, a waveguide to receive the one or more
light patterns and converge the light patterns to a first focus, and a variable focus element
(VFE) coupled to the waveguide to ge at least some of the light patterns to a second
focus, wherein the VFE is integrated into the waveguide.
In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user comprises
a light source to lex one or more light patterns associated with one or more frames of
image data in a time-sequential manner, a waveguide to receive the one or more light patterns
and converge the light patterns to a first focus, and a variable focus element (VFE) coupled to
the waveguide to converge at least some of the light ns to a second focus, n the
VFE is separate from the waveguide.
In another aspect, a method for displaying virtual content to a user, comprises
providing one or more light patterns associated with one or more frames of image data,
converging the one or more light patterns associated with the one or more frames of image
data to a first focus through a waveguide, and modifying, through a variable focus element
(VFE), the first focus of the light to produce a wavefront at a second focus.
The VFE is separate from the waveguide, in one or more embodiments. The VFE
is integrated into the waveguide, in one or more embodiments. The one or more frames of
image data are provided in a time-sequential manner, in one or more embodiments. The VFE
modifies the focus of the one or more frames of image data on a frame-by-frame basis, in one
or more embodiments. The VFE modifies the focus of the one or more frames of image data
on a pixel-by—pixel basis, in one or more embodiments. The VFE es the first focus to
produce a wavefront at a third focus, wherein the second focus is different than the third focus,
in one or more embodiments. The ont at the second focus is perceived by the user as
coming from a particular depth plane, in one or more embodiments.
In some embodiments, the ity of frames are presented to the user at a high
frequency such that the user perceives the frames as part of a single coherent scene, wherein
the VFE varies the focus from a first frame to a second frame. The light source is a scanned
light display, and wherein the VFE varies the focus in a line-by-line manner, in one or more
embodiments.
In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user, comprises
a plurality of waveguides to receive light rays associated with image data and to transmit the
light rays toward the user’s eyes, wherein the ity of waveguides are d in a direction
facing the user’s eye, and a first lens coupled to a first waveguide of the plurality of
waveguides to modify light rays transmitted from the first waveguide, thereby delivering light
rays having a first wavefront ure, and a second lens coupled to a second waveguide of
the plurality of ides to modify light rays transmitted from the second waveguide,
thereby delivering light rays having a second wavefront curvature, wherein the first lens
coupled to the first waveguide and the second lens coupled to the second waveguide are
stacked horizontally in a direction facing the user’s eye.
In one or more embodiments, the first wavefront curvature is different from the
second wavefront curvature. The system r comprises a third waveguide of the ity of
waveguides to deliver co||imated light to the user’s eye, such that the user perceives the image
data as coming from an l infinity plane, in one or more embodiments. The waveguide is
configured to transmit co||imated light to the lens, in one or more embodiments.
The system further comprises a compensating lens layer to compensate for an
aggregate power of the lenses stacked in the ion facing the user’s eyes, wherein the
compensating lens layer is stacked farthest from the user’s eye, in one or more embodiments.
The waveguide comprises a plurality of tors configurable to reflect the light rays injected
into the ide toward the user’s eye, in one or more embodiments.
The waveguide is electro-active, in one or more embodiments. The waveguide is
switchable, in one or more embodiments. The light rays having the first wavefront curvature
and the light rays having the second wavefront curvature are delivered simultaneously, in one
or more embodiments. The light rays having the first wavefront ure and the light rays
having the second wavefront curvature are delivered sequentially, in one or more
embodiments. The second wavefront curvature corresponds to a margin of the first wavefront
ure, thereby providing a focal range in which the user can accommodate, in one or more
embodiments. The system further comprises an accommodation module to track an
accommodation of a user’s eyes, and wherein the VFE varies the focus of the light patterns
based at least in part on the accommodation of the user’s eyes, in one or more embodiments.
In yet another embodiments, a system for displaying virtual content to a user,
comprises a light source to multiplex one or more light patterns associated with one or more
frames of image data in a time-sequential manner, a plurality of waveguides to receive the one
or more light patterns and to converge light to an exit pupil, n the plurality of waveguides
are stacked along a z-axis and away from the user’s line of vision, and at least one optical
element coupled to the d ides to modify a focus of the light transmitted by the
plurality of waveguides.
The waveguide of the plurality of waveguides may se a waveguide to
distribute the projected light across the length of the waveguide, and a lens to modify the light
in a manner such that a ont curvature is created, wherein the created wavefront
curvature corresponds to a focal plane when viewed by the user in one or more embodiments.
The waveguide of the plurality of waveguides comprises a ctive optical
element (DOE) in one or more embodiments. The DOE is switchable between an on and off
state, in one or more embodiments. The waveguide of the plurality of waveguides comprises a
refractive lens, in one or more embodiments. The waveguide of the plurality of waveguides
comprises a Fresnel zone plate, in one or more embodiments. The waveguide of the plurality
of waveguides comprises a ate guided optics (SGO) element, in one or more
embodiments. The waveguide is switchable between an on and off state, in one or more
embodiments. The waveguide is static, in one or more embodiments. The first frame of
image data and second frame of image data are delivered to the user’s eye simultaneously, in
one or more embodiments. The first frame of image data and second frame of image data are
red to the user’s eye sequentially, in one or more embodiments.
The system further comprises a plurality of angled tors to deliver light to the
user’s eye, wherein the first waveguide component and the second waveguide component
direct light to the one or more angled tors, in one or more embodiments. The system
further comprises a beam distribution waveguide optic, the beam distribution waveguide
coupled to the waveguide assembly, wherein the beam distribution waveguide optic is
configurable to spread the projected light across the waveguide assembly, such that a light ray
ed into the beam distributed waveguide optic is cloned and injected into waveguide
components of the waveguide assembly, in one or more embodiments.
In r embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user comprises
an image-generating source to provide one or more frames of image data in a equential
manner, a light modulator to project light associated with the one or more frames of image
data, a waveguide assembly to receiving the projected light and deliver the light towards the
user’s eye, wherein the waveguide ly comprises at least a first waveguide component
configurable to modify light associated with a first frame of the image data such the light is
perceived as coming from a first focal plane, and a second waveguide component configurable
to modify light associated with a second frame of the image data such that the light is
perceived as coming from a second focal plane, and wherein the first waveguide component
and second waveguide component are d along a z-axis in front of the user’s eye.
In some embodiments, the waveguide component of the waveguide assembly
comprises a waveguide to distribute the projected light across the length of the waveguide,
and a lens to modify the light in a manner such that a wavefront curvature is created, wherein
the created wavefront curvature corresponds to a focal plane when viewed by the user. The
waveguide component of the waveguide assembly comprises a diffractive l element
(DOE) in one or more embodiments.
The DOE is switchable n an on and off state in one or more embodiments. .
The waveguide component of the waveguide assembly comprises a refractive lens in one or
more embodiments. The waveguide component of the waveguide assembly comprises a
Fresnel zone plate in one or more embodiments. The first frame of image data and second
frame of image data are delivered to the user’s eye simultaneously in one or more
ments. The first frame of image data and second frame of image data are delivered to
the user’s eye sequentially, in one or more embodiments.
The system further comprises a ity of angled reflectors to deliver light to the
user’s eye, wherein the first waveguide component and the second waveguide component
direct light to the one or more angled reflectors in one or more embodiments. The system
further comprises a beam distribution waveguide optic, the beam distribution ide
coupled to the waveguide assembly, wherein the beam distribution waveguide optic is
configurable to spread the projected light across the waveguide assembly, such that a light ray
injected into the beam distributed waveguide optic is cloned and injected into waveguide
components of the ide assembly in one or more embodiments.
The waveguide ent of the waveguide assembly comprises a reflector
configurable to reflect the ted light at a d angle toward the user’s eye. The first
waveguide ent comprises a first reflector configured to reflect the projected light at a
first angle, and wherein the second waveguide component comprises a second reflector to
reflect the projected light at a second angle in one or more embodiments. The first reflector is
staggered in relation to the second reflector, thereby expanding a field of view of the image as
viewed by the user in one or more embodiments.
The reflectors of the waveguide ents are positioned in a manner to form a
continuous curved reflection e across the waveguide ly in one or more
embodiments. The continuous curved reflection surface comprises a parabolic curve in one or
more embodiments. The continuous curved reflection surface comprises an elliptical curve in
one or more embodiments.
In yet r embodiment, a method for displaying virtual content to a user
comprises delivering, through a first waveguide, light rays associated with a first frame of
image data to the user, the light rays having a first wavefront curvature, and delivering, through
a second waveguide, light rays associated with a second frame of image data to the user, the
light rays having a second wavefront curvature, wherein the first waveguide and second
waveguide are stacked along a z axis facing the user’s eyes.
The first wavefront curvature and the second wavefront curvature are red
simultaneously, in one or more embodiments. The first wavefront curvature and the second
wavefront ure are delivered sequentially, in one or more embodiments. The first and
second wavefront curvatures are perceived as a first and second depth plane by the user, in
one or more embodiments. The first and second ides are coupled to one or more
optical elements, in one or more ments. The method may r comprise
compensating for an effect of the one or more optical ts through a compensation lens,
in one or more embodiments.
The method may further comprise determining an accommodation of the user’s
eyes, and delivering light rays through at least one of the first and second waveguides based
at least in part on the determined accommodation, in one or more embodiments.
In another embodiment, a method for displaying virtual content to a user comprises
determining an accommodation of the user’s eyes, delivering, through a first waveguide of a
stack of waveguides, light rays having a first wavefront ure based at least in part on the
determined odation, wherein the first wavefront curvature corresponds to a focal
distance of the determined accommodation, and delivering, through a second waveguide of
the stack of waveguides, light rays having a second wavefront curvature, the second wavefront
ure associated with a predetermined margin of the focal distance of the determined
accommodation.
The margin is a positive , in one or more embodiments. The margin is a
negative margin, in one or more embodiments. The second waveguide increases a focal range
in which the user can accommodate, in one or more embodiments. The first waveguide is
coupled to a variable focus element (VFE), wherein the VFE varies a focus at which the
waveguide focuses the light rays, in one or more embodiments. The focus is varied based at
least in part on the determined accommodation of the users’ eyes, in one or more
embodiments. The first wavefront curvature and the second wavefront curvature are delivered
simultaneously, in one or more embodiments.
The first and second wavefront curvatures are perceived as a first and second
depth plane by the user, in one or more embodiments. The waveguide is a diffractive optical
element (DOE) in one or more embodiments. The waveguide is a substrate guided
, optic
(SGO), in one or more embodiments. The first and second waveguides are switchable, in one
or more embodiments. The waveguide ses one or more switchable elements, in one or
more ments.
In yet another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user
comprises an image-generating source to provide one or more frames of image data in a time-
sequential manner, a display assembly to project light rays associated with the one or more
frames of image data, the display ly comprises a first display element corresponding to
a first frame-rate and a first bit depth, and a second display element corresponding to a second
frame-rate and a second bit depth, and a variable focus element (VFE) configurable to vary a
focus of the ted light and transmit the light to the user’s eye.
The first frame-rate is higher than the second frame-rate, and the first bit depth is
lower than the second bit depth, in one or more embodiments. The first display element is a
DLP tion system, in one or more embodiments. The second display t is a
liquid crystal display (LCD), in one or more ments. The first display element projects
light to a subset of the second display element such that a periphery of the LCD has constant
illumination, in one or more embodiments. Only light transmitted from the first display element
is focused through the VFE, in one or more embodiments.
The VFE is optically conjugate to an exit pupil, such that a focus of the ted
light is varied t affecting a magnification of the image data, in one or more embodiments.
The first y element is a DLP, and the second display element is an LCD, and wherein the
DLP is of low resolution, and wherein the LCD is of high resolution, in one or more
embodiments. The intensity of backlight is varied over time to ze a brightness of sub-
images projected by the first display element, y increase a frame rate of the first y
element, in one or more embodiments.
The VFE is configurable to vary the focus of the projected light on a frame-by-frame
basis, in one or more embodiments. The system further comprises software to compensate for
optical magnification associated with an operation of the VFE, in one or more embodiments.
The image-generating source produces slices of a particular image that when projected
together or sequentially produces a three-dimensional volume of an object, in one or more
embodiments. The DLP is operated in a binary mode, in one or more embodiments. The
DLP is operated in a grayscale mode, in one or more embodiments.
The VFE varies the projected light such that a first frame is perceived as coming
from a first focal plane, and a second frame is perceived as coming from a second focal plane,
n the first focal plane is different from the second focal plane, in one or more
ments. The focal distance ated with the focal plane is fixed, in one or more
embodiments. The focal distance associated with the focal plane is variable, in one or more
embodiments.
In another embodiment, a method for displaying virtual content to a user comprises
providing one or more image slices, wherein a first and second image slice of the one or more
image slices represents a three-dimensional volume, projecting light associated with the first
image slice through a spatial light modulator, focusing, through a le focus element
(VFE), the first image slice to a first focus, delivering the first image slice having the first focus
to the user, providing light associated with the second image slice, focusing, through the VFE,
the second image slice to a second focus, wherein the first focus is different from the second
focus, and delivering the second image slice having the second focus to the user.
The method may further comprise determining an odation of the user’s
eyes, wherein the VFE focuses the projected light based at least in part on the determined
odation, in one or more embodiments. The image slices are ed in a frame-
sequential fashion, in one or more embodiments. The first image slice and the second image
slice are delivered simultaneously, in one or more embodiments. The first image slice and the
second image slice are delivered sequentially, in one or more embodiments.
In yet another embodiment, a method for displaying virtual content to a user
comprises combining a first display element with a second display element, the first display
element corresponding to a high frame rate and a low bit depth, and the second y
element corresponding to a low frame rate and a high bit depth, such that the combined
display ts correspond to a high frame rate and high bit depth, projecting light ated
with one or more frames of image data through the combined display elements, and switching
a focus of the projected light, through a variable focus element (VFE), on a frame-by-frame
basis, such that a first image slice is projected at a first focus, and a second image slice is
projected at a second focus.
In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user, comprises
a plurality of lightguides to receive nt light associated with one or more frames of image
data and to produce an aggregate wavefront, a phase modulator coupled to one or more
lightguides of the plurality of light guides to induce a phase delay in the light projected by the
one or more lightguides, and a processor to control the phase modulator in a manner such that
the aggregate wavefront produced by the plurality of lightguides is varied.
The wavefront ed a lightguide of the plurality of light guides is a spherical
wavefront, in one or more embodiments. The spherical wavefronts produced by at least two
lightguides constructively interfere with each other, in one or more embodiments. The
spherical wavefronts produced by the at least two lightguides destructively interfere with each
other, in one or more embodiments. The aggregate wavefront is an approximately planar
wavefront, in one or more ments.
The planar wavefront corresponds to an optical infinity depth plane. The
aggregate ont is cal, in one or more embodiments. The spherical wavefront
corresponds to a depth plane closer than optical infinity, in one or more embodiments. An
inverse Fourier transform of a desired beam is injected into the multicore fibers, such that a
desired aggregate wavefront is produced, in one or more embodiments.
In another aspect, a system of displaying virtual content to a user comprises an
image-generating source to provide one or more frames of image data, a multicore ly
comprising a plurality of multicore fibers to project light associated with the one or more frames
of image data, a multicore fiber of the plurality of multicore fibers ng light in a wavefront,
such that the multicore assembly produces an aggregate ont of the projected light, and
a phase modulator to induce phase delays between the multicore fibers in a manner such that
the aggregate wavefront emitted by the ore assembly is varied, thereby g a focal
distance at which the user perceives the one or more frames of image data.
In yet another aspect, a method for displaying virtual t to a user comprises
emitting light through a multicore fiber, the multicore fiber comprising a plurality of single core
, wherein the singlecore fibers emit a spherical wavefront, providing an aggregate
wavefront from light emitted from the plurality of single core fibers, and inducing a phase delay
between the singlecore fibers of the multicore fiber such the aggregate wavefront produced by
the multicore fiber is varied based at least in part on the induced phase delay.
The ate wavefront is a planar wavefront, in one or more embodiments. The
planar ont corresponds to optical infinity, in one or more embodiments. The aggregate
ont is spherical, in one or more embodiments. The spherical wavefront corresponds to
a depth plane closer than optical infinity, in one or more embodiments. The method further
comprises injecting an inverse Fourier orm of a desired wavefront into the multicore fiber
such that the aggregate wavefront corresponds to the desired wavefront, in one or more
embodiments.
In yet another embodiment, a system for ying virtual content to a user
comprises an image-generating source to provide one or more frames of image data, a
multicore assembly comprising a ity of multicore fibers to project light associated with the
one or more frames of image data, an image injector to input images into the multicore
assembly, wherein the input injector is further urable to input an inverse Fourier
transform of a desired ont into the multicore assembly such that the multicore assembly
outputs the Fourier transform by producing light associated with the image data in the desired
wavefront, thereby allowing the user to perceive the image data at a desired focal distance.
The desired wavefront is ated with a hologram, in one or more
embodiments. The inverse Fourier transform is input to te a focus of the one or more
light beams, in one or more embodiments. A multicore fiber of the plurality of ore fibers
is a multi-mode fiber, in one or more ments. The multicore fiber of the plurality of
multicore fibers is configured to propagate light along a plurality of paths along the fiber, in one
or more embodiments. The multicore fiber is a single core fiber, in one or more embodiments.
The multicore fiber is a concentric core fiber, in one or more ments.
The image injector is configured to input a wavelet pattern into the multicore
assembly, in one or more embodiments. The image injector is configured to input a Zernike
cient into the multicore assembly, in one or more embodiments. The system further
comprises an accommodation tracking module to determine an accommodation of the user’s
eye, wherein the image injector is configured to input an e Fourier transform of a
wavefront corresponding to the determined accommodation of the user’s eyes, in one or more
embodiments.
In yet another embodiment, a method of displaying virtual content to a user
comprises determining an accommodation of the user’s eyes, wherein the determined
accommodation is associated with a focal distance corresponding to a user’s current state of
focus, projecting, through a waveguide, light associated with one or more frames of image
data, varying a focus of the projected light based at least in part on the determined
accommodation, and delivering the ted light to the user’s eyes, such that the light is
perceived by the user as coming from the focal distance corresponding to the user’s current
state of focus.
The accommodation is measured directly, in one or more embodiments. The
accommodation is measured indirectly, in one or more embodiments. The accommodation is
measured through an infrared autorefractor. The accommodation is measured through
ric photorefraction, in one or more ments. The method r comprises
measuring a convergence level of two eyes of the user to estimate the accommodation, in one
or more embodiments. The method further comprises blurring one or more portions of the one
or more frames of image data based at least in part on the determined accommodation, in one
or more embodiments. The focus is varied between fixed depth planes, in one or more
embodiments. The method further comprises a compensating lens to compensate for an
optical effect of the waveguide, in one or more embodiments.
In one or more embodiments, a method of ying virtual content to a user
comprises determining an accommodation of the user’s eyes, wherein the determined
accommodation is associated with a focal distance corresponding to a user’s current state of
focus, projecting, through a diffractive optics t (DOE), light associated with one or more
frames of image data, varying a focus of the ted light based at least in part on the
determined accommodation, and delivering the projected light to the user’s eyes, such that the
light is perceived by the user as coming from the focal distance ponding to the user’s
current state of focus.
In another embodiment, a method of displaying virtual content to a user comprises
determining an accommodation of the user’s eyes, wherein the determined accommodation is
associated with a focal distance corresponding to a user’s current state of focus, ting,
h a freeform optic, light associated with one or more frames of image data, varying a
focus of the projected light based at least in part on the determined odation, and
delivering the projected light to the user’s eyes, such that the light is perceived by the user as
coming from the focal distance corresponding to the user’s current state of focus.
In another aspect, a method of displaying virtual content to a user ses
determining an accommodation of the user’s eyes, wherein the determined odation is
associated with a focal distance ponding to a user’s current state of focus, projecting light
associated with one or more frames of image data, varying a focus of the projected light based
at least in part on the determined accommodation, and delivering the projected light to the
user’s eyes, such that the light is perceived by the user as coming from the focal distance
corresponding to the user’s current state of focus.
The light is red to the user through a substrate guided optics assembly, in one
or more embodiments. The light is delivered to the user h a freeform optical element, in
one or more embodiments. The light is delivered to the user through a diffractive optical
element (DOE) in one or more embodiments. The light is projected through a stack of
waveguides, a first of the stack of waveguide configured to output light at a particular wavefront,
a second waveguide to output a positive margin wavefront relative to the particular ont, a
third waveguide to output a negative margin wavefront relative to the particular ont, in
one or more embodiments. The method further comprises blurring a portion of the one or
more frames of image data in a manner such that the portion is out of focus when the projected
light is delivered to the user’s eyes, in one or more embodiments.
In yet another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user,
comprises an generating source to provide one or more frames of image data in a timesequential
, a light generator to provide light associated with the one or more frames of
image data, an accommodation tracking module to track an accommodation of the user’s eye,
and a waveguide assembly to vary a focus of the light associated with the one or more frames
of image data, wherein different frames of image data are focused differently based at least in
part on the tracked accommodation.
In another aspect, a system for displaying virtual content to a user, comprises an
accommodation tracking module to determine an accommodation of the user’s eyes, an
image-generating source to provide one or more frames of image data in a equential
manner, a light generator to project light associated with the one or more frames of image
data, a plurality of waveguides to receive light rays associated with image data and to transmit
the light rays toward the user’s eyes, wherein the plurality of waveguides are stacked in a
direction facing the user’s eye, and a variable focus element (VFE) to vary a focus of the
transmitted light based at least in part on the ined accommodation of the user’s eyes.
The waveguide of the plurality of waveguides is a waveguide element, wherein the
focus of a first frame of image data transmitted from a first ide of the plurality of
waveguides is different from the focus of a second frame of image data transmitted from a
second waveguide of the plurality of waveguides, in one or more embodiments. The first
frame is a first layer of a 3D scene, and a second frame is a second layer of the 3D scene, in
one or more embodiments. The system further comprises a blurring module to blur a portion
of the one or more frames of image data in a manner such that the n is out of focus when
viewed by the user, in one or more embodiments.
The VFE is common to the plurality of ides, in one or more embodiments.
The VFE is associated with a waveguide of the plurality of waveguides, in one or more
embodiments. The VFE is coupled to a waveguide of the plurality of waveguides, such that
the VFE is interleaved between two waveguides of the ity of waveguides, in one or more
embodiments. The VFE is embedded into a waveguide of the plurality of waveguides, in one
or more embodiments. The VFE is a diffractive l element, in one or more ments.
The VFE is a tive element, in one or more embodiments.
The waveguide is electro-active, in one or more embodiments. One or more
waveguides of the plurality of waveguides is switched off, in one or more embodiments. A
waveguide of the plurality of waveguides corresponds to a fixed focal plane, in one or more
embodiments. The system further comprises an exit pupil, n a diameter of the exit pupil
is no greater than 0.5 mm, in one or more ments. The light generator is a scanning
fiber display. The system of claim 302, further comprising an array of exit pupils, in one or
more embodiments.
The system further comprises a plurality of light generators, a light generator
coupled to an exit pupil, in one or more ments. The system further comprises an exit
pupil expander, in one or more embodiments. The exit pupil is switchable based at least in
part on the determined accommodation of the user’s eyes, in one or more embodiments.
In another aspect, a system comprises an odation tracking module to
determine an accommodation of a user’s eyes, a fiber ng display to scan a plurality of
light beams associated with one or more frames of image data, wherein a light beam of the
plurality of light beams is movable, a blur software to render a simulated dioptric blur in the one
or more frames of image data based at least in part on the determined accommodation of the
user’s eyes.
The diameter of light beams is no greater than 2 mm, in one or more embodiments.
The diameter of light beams is no greater than 0.5 mm, in one or more ments. The
d light beam is duplicated to create a plurality of exit pupils, in one or more
embodiments. The scanned light beam is duplicated to create a larger eye box, in one or more
embodiments. The exit pupils are switchable, in one or more embodiments.
In another embodiment, a method for displaying virtual content comprises
determining an accommodation of a user’s eyes, scanning a plurality of light beams associated
with one or more frames of image data, through a fiber scanning display, wherein a diameter of
the light beam is no greater than 0.5 mm, such that the frames of image data appear in focus
when viewed by the user, and blurring, using blur software, one or more ns of the frame
based at least in part on the ined accommodation of the user’s eyes.
A plurality of exit pupils are created, in one or more embodiments. The light beam
is generated by a core fiber, in one or more embodiments. The light beam is ated
to create a plurality of exit pupils, in one or more embodiments. The exit pupils are able,
in one or more embodiments.
In another embodiment, a method for displaying virtual content to a user comprises
determining a position of the user’s pupil relative to a bundle of light projectors, wherein the
bundle of light tors corresponds to a sub-image of an image to be presented to the user,
and driving, based on the determined position of the user’s pupil, light corresponding to the
sub-image into a portion of the user’s pupil.
The method further comprises driving light corresponding to another sub-image of
the image to be presented to another portion of the user’s pupil through another bundle of light
projectors, in one or more embodiments. The method further comprises mapping one or more
bundles of light projectors of the fiber scanning display with one or more portions of the user’s
pupil, in one or more embodiments. The mapping is a 1:1 mapping, in one or more
ments.
The diameter of the light is no greater than 0.5 mm, in one or more embodiments.
The bundle of light projectors produces an aggregate ont, in one or more embodiments.
The beamlets produced by the light projectors form a discretized aggregate wavefront, in one
or more embodiments. The beamlets approach the user’s eye in parallel, the eye deflects the
beamlets to converge upon a same spot on the , in one or more ments. The
user’s eye receives a superset of beamlets, the beamlets corresponding to a plurality of angles
at which they interest the pupil, in one or more embodiments.
In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user comprises
a light source to provide light associated with one or more frames of image data, and a light
display assembly to receive the light associated with the one or more frames of image data,
wherein the light display assembly corresponds to multiple exit pupils spaced together, and
wherein the multiple exit pupils transmit light into a pupil of the user.
The multiple exit pupils are arranged in a nal e, in one or more
embodiments. The multiple exit pupils are arranged in a square lattice, in one or more
embodiments. The multiple exit pupils are arranged in a two-dimensional array, in one or more
embodiments. The multiple exit pupils are arranged in a three-dimensional array, in one or
more embodiments. The multiple exit pupils are arranged in a time-varying array, in one or
more embodiments.
In one or more embodiments, a method for displaying virtual content to a user,
comprising grouping a plurality of light projectors to form an exit pupil, driving a first light
pattern, through a first exit pupil, into a first portion of the user’s pupil, and driving a second
light pattern, through a second exit pupil, into a second portion of the user’s pupil, wherein the
first light pattern and second light pattern corresponds to sub-images of an image to be
ted to the user, and wherein the first light pattern is different than the second light
pattern. The method further comprises ng a discretized aggregate wavefront, in one or
more embodiments.
In yet another ment, a method for displaying virtual content to a user,
comprises determining a location of a pupil of the user relative to a light display ly, and
calculating a focus at which to converge light to the pupil based at least in part on a limited eye
box around the ined location of the pupil.
The diameter of light is no greater than 0.5 mm, in one or more embodiments. The
method r comprises creating a discretized aggregate wavefront, in one or more
embodiments. The method further comprises ating a ity of discrete neighboring
collimated light beams based at least in part on a center of a radius of curvature of a desired
aggregate wavefront, in one or more embodiments. The method further comprises
determining an accommodation of the user’s eyes, wherein the focus is calculated based at
least in part on the determined accommodation, in one or more embodiments.
The method further comprising selecting an angular trajectory of light of a plurality
of beamlets to create an out-of focus light beam, in one or more embodiments. A ity of
beamlets represent a pixel of image data to the presented to the user, in one or more
embodiments. The beamlets hit the eye at a plurality of incident angles, in one or more
embodiments.
In yet another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user
comprises an image generating source to provide one or more portions of an image to be
presented to the user, and a plurality of microprojectors to project light associated with the one
or more portions of the image, the microprojectors positioned in a manner facing the user’s
pupil, and n a microprojector of the plurality of microprojectors is configured to t a
set of light rays representing a n of the age, the set of light rays projected to a
portion of the user’s pupil.
A first portion of the user’s pupil receives light rays from a plurality of
microprojectors, in one or more embodiments. The system further comprises a reflective
surface to reflect the light from the plurality of microprojectors to one or more portions of the
user’s pupil, in one or more embodiments. The reflective surface is positioned in a manner
such that the user is able to view the real world through the reflective surface, in one or more
embodiments. A diameter of light is no greater than 0.5 mm, in one or more embodiments.
The system further comprises a discretized aggregate wavefront, in one or more
embodiments.
In another embodiment, a system comprises a processor to determine a location of
a user’s pupil, and an array of l light modulators (SLMs) to project light associated with
one or more frames of image data, wherein the array of SLMs are oned based at least in
part on the determined location of the user’s pupil, and wherein the array of SLMs generate a
lightfield when viewed by the user.
In r aspect, a system for displaying virtual t to a user, comprises an
image generating source to provide one or more frames of image data, a first spatial light
modulator (SLM) ured to selectively transmit light rays associated with the one or more
frames of image data, a second SLM positioned in relation to the first SLM, the second SLM
also ured to selectively transmit light rays associated with the one or more frames of
image data, and a processor to control the first and second SLMs in a manner such that a
lightfield is created when the transmitted light rays are viewed by the user.
The system r comprises an accommodation tracking module to determine an
accommodation of the user’s eyes, in one or more embodiments. The SLM is an LCD, in one
or more ments. The LCD is attenuated, in one or more embodiments. The LCD
rotates a polarization of the transmitted light, in one or more embodiments. The SLM is a
DMD, in one or more embodiments. The DMD is coupled to one or more lenses, in one or
more embodiments. The SLM is a MEMs array, in one or more embodiments. The MEMs
array comprises an array of sliding MEMs rs, in one or more embodiments. The MEMs
array is a nics ® MEMs array, in one or more embodiments.
In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user comprises
a plurality of optical fibers to project light associated with one or more frames of image data to
be ted to the user, wherein an l fiber of the ity of optical fibers is coupled to a
lens, the lens configured to alter a diameter of the light beam projected by the ng fiber,
wherein the lens comprises a gradient refractive index.
The lens is a GRIN lens, in one or more embodiments. The lens collimates the light
beams, in one or more embodiments. The system further comprises an actuator coupled to the
l fiber of the plurality of optical fibers to scan the fiber, in one or more embodiments.
The actuator is a piezo-electric actuator, in one or more embodiments. An end of the optical
fiber is ed at an angle to create a lensing effect, in one or more embodiments. An end of
the optical fiber is melted to create a lensing effect, in one or more embodiments.
A method for displaying virtual content to a user comprises projecting light
associated with one or more frames of image data, wherein the light is projected through a
plurality of optical fibers, modifying the light projected through the plurality of optical fibers
through a lens, wherein the lens is coupled to a tip of the plurality of optical fibers, and
delivering the modified light to the user, in one or more embodiments.
] In one or more embodiments, a system for displaying virtual content, comprises a
multicore assembly sing a plurality of fibers to multiplex light associated with one or
more frames of image data, and a waveguide to receive the light patterns, and transmit the
light patterns such that a first viewing zone only receives light associated with a first portion of
an image, and a second viewing zone only receives light associated with a second portion of
the image, wherein the first and second viewing zone is no greater than 0.5 mm. The system
r comprises blurring software to blur out one or more portions of the frames of image
data, in one or more embodiments. The system further comprises an accommodation module
to determine an accommodation of the user’s eyes, in one or more embodiments. The
waveguide projects light to a user’s eye directly without an intermediate viewing optic, in one or
more embodiments.
A system comprises a multicore assembly sing a plurality of fibers to
multiplex light associated with one or more frames of image data, a waveguide to receive the
light patterns, and transmit the light patterns such that a first viewing zone only es light
associated with a first n of an image, and a second viewing zone only receives light
associated with a second portion of the image, wherein the first and second viewing zone is no
greater than 0.5 mm, and an optical assembly coupled to the waveguide to modify the
transmitted light beams to the first and second g zones, in one or more embodiments.
The plurality of fibers project light into a single waveguide array. The multicore
assembly is scanned, in one or more embodiments. A time-varying light field is generated, in
one or more embodiments. The optical assembly is a DOE t. The optical assembly is
an LC layer, in one or more embodiments.
A method comprising projecting light associated with one or more frames of image
data through a multicore assembly, the multicore assembly comprising a plurality of optical
fibers, and delivering the projected light, through a waveguide, such that a first portion of the
user’s pupil receives light associated with a first portion of an image, and a second portion of
the user’s pupil receives light associated with a second portion of the image, in one or more
embodiments.
A diameter of the first and second portions is no greater than 0.5 mm, in one or
more embodiments. The ity of optical fibers project light into a single waveguide array, in
one or more embodiments. The multicore assembly is d, in one or more ments.
The waveguide comprises a plurality of reflectors, in one or more embodiments. An angle of
the reflectors is variable, in one or more embodiments. A set of optics to modify light being
delivered to the first and second viewing zones, in one or more embodiments. The set of
optics is a DOE element. The set of optics is a freeform optic. The set of optics is an LC layer,
in one or more embodiments.
In one aspect, a system ses an array of microprojectors to project light
associated with one or more frames of image data to be presented to a user, wherein the array
of microprojectors is positioned relative to a location of the user’s pupil, and n the light
is projected into the user’s pupil, in one or more embodiments. The fiber scanning display of
claim 407, wherein the first and second light beams are superimposed, in one or more
ments. The fiber scanning display of claim 407, wherein the first and second light
beam are deflected based at least in part on the critical angle of the ed bundled fiber, in
one or more embodiments. The fiber scanning display of claim 407, n the polished
bundled fibers is used to increase a resolution of the display. The polished bundled fibers is
used to create a lightfield, in one or more embodiments.
In another embodiment, a system comprises an array of microprojectors to project
light associated with one or more frames of image data to be presented to a user, wherein the
array of microprojectors is positioned relative to a location of the user’s pupil, and wherein the
light is projected into the user’s pupil, and an optical element coupled to the array of
microprojectors to modify the light projected into the user’s pupil.
In yet another embodiment, a system ses a plurality of multicore fibers to
transmit light beams, the plurality of beams coupled together, and a coupling element to
bundle the plurality of multicore fibers together, wherein the bundle of multicore fibers is
polished at a critical angle ve to a longitudinal axis of the fiber such that a first light beam
transmitted from a first fiber of the bundled fibers has a first path length, and a second light
beam transmitted from a second fiber of the d fibers has a second path length, and
n the first path length is different from the second path length such that the first light
beam is out of phase relative to the second light beam.
The first and second light beams are superimposed, in one or more ments.
The first and second light beam are deflected based at least in part on the critical angle of the
polished bundled fiber, in one or more embodiments. The polished bundled fibers is used to
increase a resolution of the display, in one or more embodiments. The polished bundled fibers
is used to create a lightfield, in one or more embodiments.
In r embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user comprises
an image-generating source to provide one or more frames of image data, a ity of optical
fibers to transmit light beams associated with the one or more frames of image data, and an
optical element coupled to the plurality of optical fibers to e collimated light from the
optical fibers and deliver the light beams to the user’s eye, wherein the light beams are
delivered at a plurality of angles to the user’s eye such that a first light beam is delivered to a
portion of a user’s eye at a first angle, and a second light beam is delivered to the same
n of the user’s eye at a second angle, wherein the first angle is different from the second
angle. The optical element is a waveguide, in one or more embodiments. The system further
comprises a phase modulator to modulate the transmission of light h the optical fibers, in
one or more embodiments.
] In yet another embodiment, a method comprises providing one or more frames of
image data, transmitting light beams associated with the one or more frames of image data
through a plurality of optical fibers, and delivering the light beams to the user’s eyes at a
ity of angles.
The method further ses modulating a phase delay of the plurality of optical
fibers, in one or more embodiments. The method further comprises coupling an optical
element to the plurality of optical fibers, in one or more ments. The optical element is a
waveguide, in one or more embodiments. The optical element is a freeform optic. The l
element is a DOE, in one or more embodiments. The optical element is a waveguide, in one
or more embodiments.
] In one or more embodiments, a virtual reality display system comprises a plurality
of optical fibers to generate light beams associated with one or more images to be presented
to a user, and a plurality of phase modulators coupled to the plurality of optical fibers to
modulate the light beams, wherein the plurality of phase modulators te the light in a
manner that affects a wavefront generated as a result of the plurality of light beams.
The one or more l fibers are deflected, at one or more , in one or more
embodiments. An optical fiber of the plurality of optical fibers is coupled to a GRIN lens, in one
or more embodiments. The plurality of optical fibers is physically actuated to scan the optical
fibers, in one or more embodiments.
In yet another aspect, a method ses providing one or more frames of image
data to be presented to a user, projecting, through a ity of optical fibers, light associated
with the one or more frames of image data, and modulating the light, through a plurality of
phase modulators, projects by the plurality of optical fibers in a manner that affects an
aggregate wavefront produced by the plurality of optical fibers.
The light projected by the one or more optical fibers is deflected at one or more
angles, in one or more ments. The one or more optical fibers is coupled to a GRIN
lens, in one or more embodiments. The method further comprises scanning the optical light
beams, wherein the plurality of optical fibers is physically actuated to scan the optical fibers, in
one or more embodiments.
In another aspect, a system for displaying l content, comprises an array of
optical fibers to transmit light beams ated with an image to be presented to a user, and a
lens coupled to the array of the optical fibers to deflect a plurality of light beams output by the
array of optical fibers through a single nodal point, wherein the lens is ally attached to
the optical fibers such that a movement of the optical fiber causes the lens to move, and
wherein the single nodal point is scanned.
The light beams output by the array of optical fibers represents a pixel of the image
to be presented to the user, in one or more embodiments. The lens is a GRIN lens, in one or
more embodiments. The array of optical fibers is used to display a lightfield, in one or more
embodiments. Another set of light beams output by another array of l fibers represents
r pixel of the image to be presented to the user, in one or more embodiments. Multiple
arrays of optical fibers are combined to represent a pixel of the image to be presented to the
user, in one or more embodiments. The array of optical fibers is configured to deliver the light
beams to a predetermined portion of the user’s pupil, in one or more embodiments. The
output light beams are diverging, in one or more embodiments. The output light beams are
converging, in one or more embodiments.
A numerical aperture of the output light beams is increased relative to the light
beams transmitted by the individual l fibers, in one or more embodiments. The
sed numerical aperture allows for higher resolution, in one or more embodiments. The
array of l fibers is beveled in a manner such that a path length of a first light beam
traveling through a first optical fiber is different than a second light beam traveling through a
second optical fiber, thereby allowing for a plurality of focal lengths of the light beams delivered
to the user’s eye, in one or more embodiments.
In another aspect, a system for displaying virtual content to a user ses an
array of microprojectors to project light associated with one or more frames of image data,
wherein one or more microprojectors of the array of microprojectors is polished at an angle
such that the projected light is deflected, and wherein the polished angle causes path length
differences between a first and second microprojectors of the array of microprojectors relative
to an optical element, and a light scanner to receive the deflected light beams and to scan
them in at least one axis.
In yet another aspect, a system to provide at least one of a virtual or an t
reality experience to a user comprises a frame, an array of micro-projectors carried by the
frame and positionable in front of at least one eye of the user when the frame is worn by the
user, and a local controller communicatively coupled to the array of micro-projectors to provide
image information to the micro-projectors, the local controller comprising at least one
processor, and at least one nsitory processor readable media communicatively coupled
to the at least one sor, the at least one nontransitory processor le media which
stores at last one of processor-executable instructions or data, which when executed by the at
least one sor causes the at least one processor to at least one of process, cache, and
store data and provide the image information to the micro-projectors to produce at least one of
a virtual or an augment reality visual experience to the user.
The system further ses at least one reflector supported by the frame and
positioned and oriented to direct light from the projectors toward at least one eye of the
user when the frame is worn by the user, in one or more embodiments. The micro-projectors
comprise respective ones of a plurality of scanning fiber displays, in one or more
ments. Each of the scanning fiber displays has a respective collimating lens at a distal
tip thereof, in one or more embodiments. The respective collimating lens is a gradient
refractive index (GRIN) lens, in one or more embodiments.
The respective collimating lens is a curved lens, in one or more embodiments. The
respective collimating lens is fused to the distal tip of the tive scanning fiber display, in
one or more embodiments. The scanning fiber displays has a respective diffractive lens at a
distal tip thereof, in one or more embodiments. Each of the scanning fiber displays has a
respective diffuser at a distal tip thereof, in one or more embodiments.
The diffuser is etched into the respective distal tip, in one or more embodiments.
Each of the scanning fiber displays has a respective lens at a distal tip thereof, the lens which
extends from the distal tip by a sufficient distance as to freely e in response to a stimulus,
in one or more embodiments. Each of the scanning fiber displays has a respective tor at
a distal tip f, the reflector which extends from the distal tip by a sufficient distance as to
freely e in response to a stimulus, in one or more embodiments. The scanning fiber
displays each includes a respective single mode optical fiber, in one or more embodiments.
] The scanning fiber displays each include a respective mechanical transducer
coupled to move at least a distal tip of the single mode optical fiber, in one or more
ments. The respective mechanical transducers are each piezoelectric actuators, in one
or more embodiments. Each the single mode optical fibers has a distal tip, the distal tips
having a herical lens shape, in one or more embodiments. Each the single mode
optical fibers has a distal tip, the distal tips having a refractive lens affixed thereto, in one or
more embodiments.
] The system further comprises a transparent holder ate which retains the
plurality of single mode optical fibers together, in one or more embodiments. The transparent
holder substrate has a refractive index that at least approximately s a refractive index of
a cladding of the single mode optical fibers, in one or more embodiments. The transparent
holder substrate retains the plurality of single mode optical fibers each angled toward a
common spot, in one or more embodiments.
The system further comprises at least one mechanical transducer d to move
the plurality of single mode optical fibers in , in one or more embodiments. The at least
one mechanical transducer vibrates the plurality of single mode optical fibers at a mechanical
resonant frequency of the single mode optical fibers a portion of which are cantilevered out
from the arent holder substrate, in one or more embodiments. The micro-projectors
comprise respective ones of a plurality of planar waveguides, a portion of each of the planar
waveguides which s cantilevered from a holder ate, in one or more embodiments.
The system further comprises at least one mechanical transducer coupled to move the plurality
of planar waveguides in unison, in one or more embodiments.
The at least one mechanical transducer vibrates the holder substrate at a
mechanical resonant frequency of the planar waveguides, in one or more embodiments. The
micro-projectors comprise respective ones of a plurality of piezoelectric actuators coupled to
move respective ones of the planar waveguides with respect to the holder substrate, in one or
more embodiments. The planar waveguides each define an totally internally reflective path
along a respective length of the planar ide, and the planar waveguides comprise
respective ones of a plurality of electronically switchable diffractive optical elements (DOEs)
operable to propagate light outward of the respective totally internally reflective path, in one or
more ments. The array of projectors comprises an array of optical fibers, each
having a distal tip and at least one bevel edge, in one or more embodiments. The at least one
bevel edge is at the distal tip, and the distal tip is a polished distal tip, in one or more
embodiments.
Each of the optical fibers has a reflective surface at the respective distal tip thereof,
in one or more embodiments. The distal tip has an output edge at the distal tip at a defined
critical angle to a longitudinal axis of the respective optical fiber, in one or more embodiments.
The defined critical angle is an approximately forty-five (45) degree to the udinal axis of
the respective optical fiber, in one or more ments. The system further comprises a
focusing lens in an optical path of light exiting the distal ends of the optical fibers, to receive a
plurality of beams of the light, the beams out of phase with one r, in one or more
embodiments. The system further comprises at least one transducer coupled to move at least
one of the l fibers in an X-Y Cartesian coordinate system, to move light emitted by the at
least one optical fiber in an X-Z Cartesian coordinate system, in one or more embodiments.
The at least one ucer is a first piezoelectric actuator that resonates a cantilevered
portion of the optical fibers in a direction perpendicular to a direction at which the cantilevered
portions extend, in one or more embodiments.
The optical fibers comprise a thin ribbon of optical fibers, in one or more
ments. The at least one transducer is a second piezoelectric actuator that moves at
least the cantilevered portion of the optical fibers in a direction longitudinal to the ion at
which the evered portions extend, in one or more embodiments. The microprojectors
include at least one a single axis mirror operable to e a slow scan along a longitudinal
axis of at least one of the optical , in one or more embodiments. The array of optical
fibers comprises a multicore fiber, in one or more embodiments. The multicore fiber includes a
plurality of approximately seven sparsely positioned clusters within a single conduit, each
cluster comprising three optical fibers, each optical fiber to carry a respective one of three
different colors of light, in one or more embodiments.
The multicore fiber includes a plurality of approximately nineteen sparsely
positioned clusters within a single conduit, each cluster comprising three optical fibers, each
optical fiber to carry a respective one of three different colors of light to produce a triad of
overlapped spots of three different colors, in one or more embodiments. The multicore fiber
includes at least one cluster within a single conduit, the cluster comprising at least three optical
fibers, each, each of the optical fibers to carry at least two different colors of light, in one or
more embodiments.
The multicore fiber includes at least one cluster within a single conduit, the at least
one cluster sing four l fibers, each optical fiber to carry a tive one of four
different colors of light, where one of the four colors is infrared or near-infrared, in one or more
embodiments. The multicore fiber includes a ity of cores in a tight bundle, and further
ses at least one transducer coupled to move the cores in a sparse spiral pattern, in one
or more embodiments. The at least one bevel edge is spaced inwardly from the distal tip, in
one or more embodiments. The at least one bevel edge is ed, in one or more
embodiments.
The system r comprises at least one transducer coupled to move at least one
of the l fibers in an X—Y ian coordinate system, to move light emitted by the at
least one optical fiber in an X-Z Cartesian coordinate system, in one or more embodiments.
The system further comprises a focusing lens in an optical path of light exiting the
bevel edges of the optical fibers, to receive a plurality of beams of the light, the beams out of
phase with one r, in one or more embodiments. The system further comprises a laser,
and at least one phase modulator that optically couples an output of the laser to a number of
cores of the multicore fiber to achieve mutual coherence, in one or more embodiments.
The system further comprises a lenslet array optically coupled upstream of an input
end of respective ones of a number of cores of the multicore fiber, and a prism array optically
coupled between the plurality of collimation lenses and the input end of the cores of the
multicore fiber to deflect light from the t array to the cores of the multicore fiber, in one or
more embodiments.
The system further comprises a lenslet array optically coupled upstream of an input
end of respective ones of a number of cores of the multicore fiber, and a shared focusing lens
optically coupled between the lenslet array and the input end of the cores of the multicore fiber
to deflect light from the lenslet array to the cores of the multicore fiber, in one or more
embodiments.
The array of micro-projectors further comprises at least one reflector, the at least
one reflector operable to produce scan pattern and optically coupled to the array of optical
fibers, in one or more ments. The at least one reflector is operable to produce at least
one of a raster scan pattern, a Lissajous scan pattern, or a spiral scan pattern of a multifocal
beam, in one or more embodiments. The each core of the multicore fiber addresses a
respective part of an image plane without overlap, in one or more ments. The each
core of the multicore fiber addresses a respective part of an image plane with ntial
overlap, in one or more embodiments.
In another embodiment, a system for ying virtual content, comprises an
image-source to e one or more frames of image data to be presented to a user, a fiber
scanning display, the fiber scanning display comprising a plurality of fibers to t light
associated with the one or more frames of image data, wherein the plurality of fibers are
scanned using an actuator and a processor to control the fiber scanning display in a manner
such that a light field is presented to the user.
The actuator is shared among all the fibers of the fiber ng display, in one or
more embodiments. The each fiber has its dual actuator, in one or more embodiments.
The plurality of fibers are mechanically d by a lattice, such that the plurality of fibers
move together, in one or more embodiments. The lattice is a graphene plane, in one or more
embodiments. The lattice is a lightweight strut, in one or more embodiments.
In another embodiment, a system to provide at least one of a virtual or an augment
reality experience to a user, comprises a frame, a display system carried by the frame and
positionable in front of at least one eye of the user when the frame is worn by the user, and a
local controller icatively coupled to the display system to provide image information to
the display system, the local controller comprising at least one processor, and at least one
nontransitory processor readable media communicatively coupled to the at least one
processor, the at least one nontransitory processor readable media which stores at last one of
processor-executable instructions or data, which when executed by the at least one processor
causes the at least one processor to at least one of process, cache, and store data and
provide the image ation to the display to produce at least one of a l or an augment
reality visual experience to the user.
] The y comprises at least one wedge-shaped waveguide, the wedge-shaped
waveguide having at least two flat surfaces opposed from one another across a thickness of
the first wedge-shaped waveguide and having a length along which light entering the wedge-
shaped waveguide at defined angles via an entrance portion of the wedge-shaped waveguide
propagates via total internal reflection, the thickness of the wedge-shaped waveguide which
varies linearly along the length of the wedge-shaped waveguide, in one or more embodiments.
The shaped waveguide provides a bi-modal total internal reflection, in one or more
embodiments.
The system r comprises at least two projectors optically coupled to the
wedge-shaped waveguide at respective different locations along the entrance portion of the
wedge-shaped waveguide, in one or more embodiments. The system further comprises a first
linear array of a plurality of projectors optically coupled to the wedge-shaped waveguide at
tive different locations along the entrance portion of the shaped waveguide, in
one or more embodiments.
The projectors of the first linear array of a plurality of projectors are scanning fiber
displays, in one or more embodiments. The system further comprises a stack of a plurality of
spatial light modulators optically coupled to the wedge-shaped waveguide along the entrance
portion of the wedge-shaped waveguide, in one or more embodiments. The system further
comprises a multicore l fiber optically coupled to the wedge-shaped waveguide at one or
more locations along the entrance portion of the wedge-shaped waveguide, in one or more
embodiments.
The projectors of the first linear array of projectors are optically coupled to the
shaped ide to inject light into the wedge-shaped waveguide at a first angle,
further comprising a second linear array of a plurality of projectors optically coupled to the
wedge-shaped waveguide at respective different locations along the entrance portion of the
wedge-shaped waveguide, n the projectors of the second linear array of projectors are
optically coupled to the wedge-shaped waveguide to inject light into the wedge-shaped
waveguide at a second angle, the second angle different from the first angle, in one or more
embodiments.
The entrance portion is longitude end of the wedged-shaped waveguide, in one or
more embodiments. The entrance portion is a l edge of the -shaped waveguide,
in one or more embodiments. The entrance portion is a one of the flat surfaces of the wedged-
shaped ide, in one or more embodiments. The system further comprises at least one
optical component optically coupled to a tor, and which changes an angle of light
received from the projector to lly couple the light to the wedge-shaped waveguide at
angles that achieve total internal reflection of the light within the wedge-shaped waveguide, in
one or more embodiments.
In another aspect, a system for displaying virtual content to a user, comprises an
array of microprojectors to project light beams associated with one or more frames of image
data to be presented to the user, wherein the rojector is configurable to be movable
relative to one or more microprojectors of the array of the microprojectors, a frame to house
the array of microprojectors, a processor operatively coupled to the one or more
rojectors of the array of microprojectors to control one or more light beams transmitted
from the one or more projectors in a manner such that the one or more light beams are
modulated as a on of a position of the one or more microprojectors relative to the array of
microprojectors, thereby enabling ry of a lightfield image to the user.
The microprojector of the array of microprojectors is coupled to a lens, in one or
more embodiments. The array of microprojectors is arranged in a manner based on a desired
resolution of the image to be presented to the user, in one or more embodiments. The array of
rojectors is ed based on a desired field of view, in one or more embodiments.
The light beams of a plurality of microprojectors p, in one or more embodiments. The
system further comprises an actuator, wherein the actuator is coupled to one or more
microprojectors, and wherein the actuator is configurable to move the one or more
microprojectors, in one or more embodiments.
The actuator is coupled to a plurality of microprojectors, in one or more
embodiments. The actuator is coupled to a single microprojector, in one or more
embodiments. The microprojector of the array of micropojectors is mechanically coupled to a
lattice, in one or more embodiments.
In yet another embodiment, a contact lens to interface with a cornea of an eye of a
user of a virtual or augmented reality display comprises a partially herical substrate and
a selective filter. The selective filter is configured to selectively pass light beams to a user’s
eye, in one or more embodiments. The selective filter is a notch filter, in one or more
embodiments. The notch filter substantially blocks wavelengths at approximately 450nm (peak
blue) and substantially passes other wavelengths in a visible portion of the omagnetic
spectrum, in one or more ments. The notch filter substantially blocks wavelengths at
approximately 530nm ) and ntially passes other wavelengths in a visible portion
of the omagnetic spectrum, in one or more embodiments. The notch filter substantially
blocks wavelengths at approximately 650nm and substantially passes other wavelengths in a
visible portion of the electromagnetic um, in one or more embodiments.
The notch filter comprises a plurality of layers of dielectric materials carried by the
substrate, in one or more embodiments. The filter has a pinhole opening of less than 1.5mm
diameter, in one or more embodiments. The pinhole opening allows light beams of a plurality
of wavelengths to pass through, in one or more embodiments. A size of the pinhole is varied
based at least in part on a d depth of focus of the display, in one or more ments.
The contact lens further comprises a plurality of modes of operation, in one or more
embodiments. The t lens further comprises a multi-depth of focus display configuration
of the virtual content, in one or more embodiments.
The contact lens further comprises an accommodation tracking module to
determine an odation of the user’s eye, in one or more embodiments. A depth of
focus of a ular display object is varied based at least in part on the determined
accommodation, in one or more embodiments. The image is relayed through a waveguide, the
relayed image associated with a particular depth of focus, in one or more embodiments.
In another embodiment, a method for ying virtual content to a user, comprises
providing one or more frames of image data to be presented to a user, projecting light
associated with the one or more frames of image data, and receiving, through a partially
hemispherical substrate coupled to the user’s pupil, the ted light and selectively ing
out the light beams to the user’s pupil.
In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual t to a user, comprises
a light projection system to project light associated with one or more frames of image data to a
user’s eyes, the light project system configured to project light corresponding to a plurality of
pixels ated with the image data, and a processor to modulate a depth of focus of the
plurality of pixels displayed to the user.
The depth of focus is modulated spatially, in one or more ments. The depth
of focus is modulated over time, in one or more embodiments. The system further comprises
an image-generating source to provide the one or more frames of image data in a time-
sequential manner, in one or more embodiments. The depth of focus is modulated on a frame-
to-frame basis, in one or more embodiments. The light projection system comprises a plurality
of optical fibers, and wherein the depth of focus is modulated across the plurality of optical
fibers such that a portion of the optical fibers is associated with a first depth of focus, and
another portion of the optical fibers is associated with a second depth of focus, wherein the
first depth of focus is different from the second depth of focus in one or more embodiments.
A first display object of a particular frame is displayed through a first depth of focus,
and a second display object of the particular frame is displayed through a second depth of
focus, wherein the first depth of focus is different from the second depth of focus, in one or
more embodiments. A first pixel of a particular frame is associated with a first depth of focus,
and a second pixel of the ular frame is associated with a second depth of focus, wherein
the first depth of focus is different from the second depth of focus, in one or more
ments. The system further comprises an accommodation tracking module to determine
an accommodation of the user’s eyes, wherein the depth of focus is modulated based at least
in part on the determined odation, in one or more embodiments.
A pattern of light generation associated with the light generation system is
dynamically slaved to the ined accommodation, in one or more embodiments. The
n is scanning pattern of a plurality of optical fibers, in one or more embodiments. The
system further comprises a blurring module to blur one or more portions of the image data,
wherein the blurring is created to smooth a transition between a first scan pattern and a
second scan pattern or a first resolution scan pitch to a second resolution scan pitch, in one or
more embodiments.
In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user, comprises
a light projection system to project light ated with one or more frames of image data to a
user’s eyes, the light project system configured to project light corresponding to a plurality of
pixels associated with the image data, a processor to modulate a size of the plurality of pixels
displayed to the user.
The light projection system is a fiber scanning display, in one or more
embodiments. The projected light is displayed through a scanning pattern, in one or more
embodiments. The sor tes the size of a particular pixel based at least in part on
a type of scanning pattern, in one or more embodiments. The size of the one or more pixels
may be modulated based at least in part on a distance between scan lines of the scanning
pattern, in one or more embodiments. The size of a first pixel is ent from the size of a
second pixel in the same frame, in one or more embodiments.
In another aspect, a method for displaying virtual t to a user, ses
projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data, wherein one or more light
beams of the projected light correspond to one or more pixels, wherein light is projected
through a fiber scanning display, and modulating a size of the one or more pixels displayed to
the user, in one or more embodiments.
The size of a particular pixel is varied based at least in part on a scanning pattern
of the fiber scanning display, in one or more embodiments. The size of the one or more pixels
is ted based at least in part on a distance between scan lines of the scanning pattern,
in one or more embodiments. The size of the one or more pixels is variable, in one or more
embodiments.
In yet another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user,
comprises a display system that delivers light associated with one or more frames of image
data, wherein the y system comprises a plurality of pixels, wherein the display system
scans light having variable line pitch, a blurring module to variably blur one or more pixels of
the ity of pixels to modify a size of the one or more pixels, and a processor to control the
blurring module in a manner such pixel size is varied based at least in part on the line pitch of
the y system, in one or more embodiments. The display system is a fiber ng
system, in one or more embodiments. The pixel size is enlarged, in one or more
embodiments. The pixel size is reduced, in one or more embodiments. The pitch line is
sparse, in one or more embodiments. The pitch line is dense, in one or more embodiments.
In another aspect, a method of displaying virtual content to a user, the method
comprises projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data to be presented
to the user, ively attenuating at least a n of the projected light beams based at least
in part on a characteristic of the image data, and delivering the attenuated light beams to the
user’s eyes.
The light beam is selectively attenuated based at least in part on angle of incidence
of the light beam, in one or more ments. Different portions of the frame are attenuated
to different amounts, in one or more embodiments. A depth of focus of the ated light
beams is varied, in one or more embodiments.
In one or more embodiments, a system for displaying virtual content to a user,
comprises an image generating source to provide one or more frames of image data, a stack
of two or more l light modulators (SLMs) positioned such that the stack delivers light
associated with the one or more frames of image data to the user, wherein the SLM spatially
attenuates light from an outside environment, and a processor to l the stack of SLMs in
a manner such that an angle at which light beams pass through one or more cells of the SLM
is modulated.
The system r comprises a set of display optics, wherein the set of display
optics is positioned between the user’s eye and the outside environment, in one or more
ments. The SLMs of the stack of SLMs are cholesteric LCDs. The at least one of the
SLMs is a cholesteric LCD, in one or more embodiments. The stack of SLMs is positioned
such that the user views an outside world h the stack of SLMs, wherein the SLMs is at
least semi-transparent, in one or more embodiments.
The l light tor arrays se at least one of a number or liquid
crystal arrays, a number of digital mirror device elements of digital light processing systems, a
number of electro-mechanical system (MEMS) arrays, or a number of MEMS shutters, in
one or more embodiments. The system further comprises an occluder comprising at least one
optical component, and wherein the processor controls the at least one optical component of
the occluder to produce a darkfield representation of a dark virtual object. in one or more
embodiments
] In another aspect, a system for displaying virtual content, the system comprises an
array of spatial light modulators, the array of spatial light modulators configured to generate
light patterns, and wherein the array of spatial light modulators ses at least two
modulators, and a processor to control the array of spatial modulators in a manner such that
the at least two spatial modulators form a Moire pattern, n the Moire pattern is a periodic
spatial pattern attenuates light at a different period than a period of the light patterns forms on
the at least two spatial light modulators.
The spatial light modulator arrays comprise at least two spatial light modulator
arrays optically d to one another, and which are control passage of light via moire
effects, in one or more embodiments. The at least two spatial light modulator arrays each bear
a respective attenuation pattern, in one or more embodiments. The at least two spatial light
modulator arrays each bear a respective fine-pitch sine wave pattern printed, etched, or other
inscribed thereon or therein, in one or more embodiments. The at least two spatial light
modulator arrays are in registration with one another, in one or more embodiments. The at
least two spatial light modulator arrays each bear a respective attenuation pattern, in one or
more embodiments.
In yet another embodiment, a system for display l content to a user,
comprises a light generating source to provide light associated with one or more frames of
image data, wherein the light generating source is a spatial light modulator, a pinhole array
positioned in a manner relative to the spatial light modulator such that a pinhole of the pinhole
array receives light from a plurality of cells of the spatial light modulator, and n a first
light beam passing through the pinhole corresponds to a different angle than a second light
beam passing through the pinhole, and wherein the cell of spatial light modulator selectively
attenuate light.
] An outside environment is viewed through the pinhole array and the SLMs, and
wherein light beams are selectively attenuated based at least in part on the angle of incidence
of the light beams, in one or more embodiments. The light from different portions of a visual
field is selectively attenuated, in one or more embodiments. The system further comprises a
selective attenuation layer selectively operable to attenuation transmission of light
therethrough, the selective attenuation layer optically in series with the pinhole layer, in one or
more embodiments.
The selective attenuation layer comprises a liquid crystal array, l light projector
system, or l light tor arrays which bear respective attenuation patterns, in one or
more embodiments. The pinhole array placed at a distance of approximately 30mm from a
cornea of an eye of the user, and the selective attenuation panel is located opposite the
pinhole array from the eye, in one or more embodiments. The pinhole array comprises a
plurality of pinholes, and wherein the process controls the SLMs in a manner such light is
attenuated as a function of the angles at which light beams pass through the plurality of
pinholes, thereby ing an aggregate light field, in one or more embodiments. The
aggregate light field causes occlusion at a desired focal distance, in one or more
embodiments.
] In another ment, a system comprises a light generating source to provide
light associated with one or more frames of image data, n the light ting source is
a spatial light tor, a lens array positioned in a manner relative to the spatial light
modulator such that a lens of the lens array receives light from a plurality of cells of the spatial
light modulator, and wherein a first light beam received at the lens ponds to a different
angle than a second light beam received at the lens, and wherein the cells of spatial light
modulator selectively attenuate light, in one or more embodiments.
The outside environment is viewed through the lens array and the SLMs, and
wherein light beams are ively ated based at least in part on the angle of incidence
of the light beams, in one or more embodiments. The light from different portions of a visual
field is selectively attenuated, in one or more embodiments. The lens array ses a
plurality of lenses, and wherein the process controls the SLMs in a manner such light is
attenuated as a function of the angles at which light beams are received at the ity of
, thereby producing an aggregate light field, in one or more embodiments. The
aggregate light field causes occlusion at a desired focal distance, in one or more
embodiments.
In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user,
comprises a light projector to project light associated with one or more frames of an image
data, at least one polarization sensitive layer to receive the light and rotate a polarization of the
light, and an array of polarization modulators to modulate the polarization of the polarization
sensitive layer, and wherein a state of the cell in the array determines how much light passes
through the polarization sensitive layer. The system is placed in a near-to-eye configuration, in
one or more embodiments. The polarization tor is a liquid crystal array, in one or more
embodiments.
The system further comprises a parallax r to offset the polarizer such that
different exit pupils have different paths through the zer, in one or more embodiments.
The polarizer is an xpol polarizer, in one or more embodiments. The polarizer is a multiPol
polarizer, in one or more ments. The polarizer is a patterned polarizer, in one or more
ments. The light interacts with one or more MEMs arrays, in one or more
embodiments.
The system further comprises SLMs to project light, wherein the SLMs are
oned between one or more optical ts, wherein the optical elements correspond to
a zero magnification telescope, in one or more embodiments. The user views an outside
environment through the zero-magnification telescope, in one or more embodiments. The at
least one SLM is positioned at an image plane within the zero-magnification telescope, in one
or more embodiments. The system further ses a DMD, wherein the DMD corresponds
to a transparent substrate, in one or more embodiments.
The system further comprises an occluder sing at least one optical
component, and wherein the processor ls the at least one optical component of the
occluder to produce a darkfield representation of a dark virtual , in one or more
embodiments. The system further comprises one or more LCDs, wherein the one or more
LCDs ively attenuate light beams, in one or more embodiments. The system further
comprises one or more LCDs, wherein the one or more LCDs serve as polarization rotators, in
one or more embodiments. The occluder is a louver MEMs device, in one or more
embodiments.
The louver MEMs device is opaque, and n the louver MEMs device changes
an angle of incidence on a pixel-by-pixel basis, in one or more embodiments. The occluder is
a sliding panel MEMs device, wherein the sliding panel MEMs device slides back and forth to
modify a region of occlusion, in one or more embodiments.
In another embodiment, a method for displaying virtual content comprises
projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data, rotating a polarization of
light through a polarization sensitive layer at a substrate which receives the projected light,
and modulating a polarization of light to selectively attenuate light passing through the
polarization layer.
The polarization modulator is a liquid crystal array, in one or more embodiments.
The method further comprises creating a parallax barrier to offset the polarizer such that
different exit pupils have different paths h the polarizer, in one or more ments.
The polarizer is an xpol polarizer, in one or more embodiments. The polarizer is a ol
polarizer, in one or more embodiments. The zer is a patterned polarizer, in one or more
ments.
In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content, ses a light
generating source to provide light ated with one or more frames of image data, wherein
the light generating source is a spatial light modulator, an array of micro-electro-mechanical
(MEMs) s, wherein the MEMs louvers are housed in a ntially transparent
substrate, and wherein the MEMs louvers are configurable to change an angle at which light is
delivered to a pixel, and wherein the angle of a first pixel red to the user is different from
a second pixel delivered to the user.
The at least one optical component comprises a first array of micro-electro-
mechanical system (MEMS) louvers, in one or more embodiments. The array of MEMS louvers
comprises a plurality of substantially opaque louvers carried by an optically transparent
substrate, in one or more ments. The array of micro-electro-mechanical system
(MEMS) louvers has a louver pitch sufficiently fine to selectably occlude light on a by-
pixel basis, in one or more embodiments. The system further comprises at least one optical
component of the occluder comprises a second array of MEMS s, the second array of
MEMS louvers in a stack configuration with the first array of MEMS louvers, in one or more
embodiments.
The array of MEMS louvers comprises a plurality of polarizing louvers carried by an
optically transparent substrate, a respective polarization state of each of the louvers selectively
controllable, in one or more embodiments. The louvers of the first and the second arrays of
MEMS panels are polarizers, in one or more embodiments. The at least one optical
component of the occluder comprises a first array of micro-electro-mechanical system (MEMS)
panels mounted for movement in a frame, in one or more embodiments.
The panels of the first array of MEMS panels are slidably mounted for movement in
the frame, in one or more embodiments. The panels of the first array of MEMS panels are
pivotably mounted for movement in the frame, in one or more embodiments. The panels of the
first array of MEMS panels are both translationally and pivotably mounted for movement in the
frame, in one or more embodiments. The panels of moveably to produce a moire pattern, in
one or more embodiments. The at least one optical component of the occluder further
comprises a second array of MEMS panels mounted for movement in a frame, the second
array in a stack configuration with the first array, in one or more embodiments. The panels of
the first and the second arrays of MEMS panels are zers. The at least one optical
component of the occluder comprises a reflector array, in one or more embodiments.
] In another embodiment, a system comprises at least one waveguide to receive light
from an outside environment and direct the light to one or more spatial light modulators,
n the one or more spatial light modulators selectively attenuate the received light in
different portions of a visual field of the user. The at least one waveguide comprises a first and
second ides, and wherein the second waveguide is configured to deliver light exiting
the SLMs to the user’s eye, in one or more embodiments.
In another embodiment, a method comprises receiving light from an outside
nment, directing the light to a selective attenuator, and selectively attenuating, through
the selective attenuator, the received light in different portions of a visual field of the user.
] The at least one waveguide comprises a first and second waveguides, and n
the second waveguide is configured to deliver light exiting the SLMs to the user’s eye, in one
or more embodiments. The selective attenuator is a spatial light modulator, in one or more
embodiments. The spatial light modulator is a DMD array, in one or more embodiments. The
light is directed to the one or more l light modulators through one or more waveguides, in
one or more embodiments. The method further comprises recoupling light back to the
waveguide, causing light to partially exit toward the user’s eye, in one or more embodiments.
The ide is oriented substantially perpendicular to the selective attenuator, in one or
more embodiments.
In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user,
ses a light ting source to e light associated with one or more frames of
image data, wherein the light generating source comprises a plurality of rojectors, and
a ide configured to receive light from the plurality of microprojectors and transmit light
to a user’s eye.
The microprojectors are placed in a linear array, in one or more embodiments. The
microprojectors are placed in one edge of the waveguide, in one or more embodiments. The
microprojectors are placed in le edges of the waveguide. The rojectors are
placed in a two dimensional array, in one or more embodiments. The microprojectors are
placed in a three-dimensional array, in one or more embodiments. The rojectors are
placed at multiple edges of the substrate, in one or more embodiments. The microprojectors
are placed at multiple angles, in one or more embodiments.
In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content, comprises an image
generating source to provide one or more frames of image data, wherein the image data
comprises one or more virtual objects to be presented to a user, and a ing engine to
render the one or more virtual objects in a manner such that a halo is ved by the user
around the one or more virtual objects.
The system further comprises a light attenuator, wherein the light attenuator
es a light intensity of the halo across the visual field of the user, in one or more
embodiments.
In another embodiment, a method for displaying virtual content, comprises
providing one or more frames of image data, wherein the image data comprises one or more
virtual s to be presented to a user, and ing the one or more virtual objects in a
manner such that a halo is perceived by the user around the one or more virtual objects,
thereby making it easier for the user to view the virtual object, wherein the virtual object is a
dark virtual object.
The method further comprises selectively attenuating light receiving from an outside
environment, through a light attenuator, wherein the light attenuator balances a light intensity
of the halo across a visual field of the user, in one or more embodiments.
In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content, comprises a
camera system to capture a view of a real environment, an l see-through system that
displays one or more virtual objects mposed over the view of the real environment,
wherein the captured view is used to render the one or more virtual objects presented to the
user, and a light intensity module to modulate a light intensity of the view of the real
environment, based at least on a correlation between one or more real objects, and the one or
more virtual objects, such that a dark virtual object is visible in st with the one or more
real s, in one or more embodiments.
The captured view is used to te a halo around one or more virtual objects,
wherein the halo fades across space, in one or more embodiments. The system further
comprises a light attenuator, wherein the light attenuator balances a light intensity of the halo
across the visual field of the user, in one or more embodiments.
In yet another embodiment, a method of driving an augmented reality display
system, the method comprises rendering a first virtual object at a location on a field of view of
a user, and rendering a visual emphasis at least spatially proximate the rendered first virtual
object in the field of view of the user substantially concurrently with the rendering of the first
virtual object.
The rendering a visual emphasis includes rendering the visual emphasis with an
intensity gradient, in one or more embodiments. The rendering a visual emphasis includes
rendering the visual emphasis with ng proximate a perimeter of the visual emphasis, in
one or more embodiments.
The rendering a visual emphasis at least spatially proximate the rendered first
virtual object includes rendering a halo visual effect spatially proximate the rendered first virtual
object, in one or more embodiments. The rendering a halo visual effect spatially proximate the
rendered first virtual object includes rendering the halo visual effect to be brighter than the
rendered first virtual object, in one or more embodiments.
The rendering the halo visual effect to be brighter than the rendered first virtual
object is in response to a determination that the rendered first virtual object is darker than a
threshold value of darkness, in one or more embodiments. The rendering a halo visual effect
includes rendering the halo visual effect in a separate focal plane from the rendered first virtual
object in a ved three-dimensional space, in one or more embodiments. The ing a
halo visual effect includes rendering the halo visual effect with an intensity gradient, in one or
more embodiments. The ing a halo visual effect includes ing the halo visual
effect with an intensity gradient that matches a dark halo resulting from occlusion applied to
the rendering of the first virtual object to compensate for a darkfield effect of the occlusion, in
one or more embodiments.
The rendering a halo visual effect includes rendering the halo visual effect with
blurring proximate a perimeter of the halo visual effect, in one or more embodiments. The
rendered first visual object has a rcular perimeter and the rendered halo visual effect
conforms to the non-circular perimeter, in one or more embodiments. The rendering a visual
is at least spatially ate the rendered first virtual object includes rendering the
visual effect in a te focal plane from the ed first virtual object in a perceived three-
dimensional space, in one or more embodiments. The rendering the visual effect in a te
focal plane from the rendered first virtual object in a perceived three-dimensional space
includes ing the visual effect in a focal plane spaced relative away from the user with
respect to a focal plane in which the rendered first l object is rendered, in one or more
embodiments.
In r embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content, comprises an
image generating source to provide one or more frames of image data to be presented to a
user, wherein the one or more frames of image data comprises at least one black virtual
object, and a rendering image to render the one or more frames of image data, and wherein
the rendering engine renders the black virtual object as a blue virtual object, such that the
black virtual object is visible to the user.
The rendering a first virtual object at a location on a field of view of a user includes,
first changing any black intonations of the first virtual object to a dark blue color, in one or more
embodiments.
In yet r ment, a system for transmitting light beams for display of
virtual content, comprises at least one waveguide, the at least one waveguide having a first
end, a second end spaced from the first end across a length of the at least one waveguide, the
length along which light entering the respective waveguide at defined angles propagates via
total internal reflection, at least one edge reflector positioned at least proximate a first end of
the at least one ide to optically tively couple light back to the first end of the at
least one waveguide, and at least one edge reflector positioned at least proximate a second
end of the at least one waveguide to optically reflectively couple light back to the second end
of the at least one waveguide.
The at least one ide has a number of transverse reflective and/or diffractive
surfaces internal to the waveguide that redirect at least a portion of the light transversely
outward of the waveguide, in one or more embodiments. The transverse reflective and/or
diffractive surfaces are low diffraction efficiency diffractive optical elements (DOEs) in one or
more embodiments. The at least one edge reflector positioned at least proximate a first end of
the at least one waveguide ses a plurality of tors positioned at least proximate the
first end of the at least one ide, in one or more embodiments.
The at least one edge reflector positioned at least proximate a second end of the at
least one waveguide comprises a plurality of reflectors positioned at least proximate the
second end of the at least one waveguide, in one or more embodiments. The at least one
waveguide is a single waveguide, in one or more ments.
In yet another embodiment, a system for transmitting light beams for display of
virtual content, comprises a ide assembly comprising a plurality of planar waveguides,
each of the planar waveguides respectively having at least two flat parallel major faces
opposed from one another across a thickness of the planar waveguide, a first end, and a
second opposed to the first end across a length of the waveguide, the length along which light
entering the respective ide at defined angles propagates via total internal reflection,
and two flat major edges opposed to one another across a width of the waveguide, the plurality
of planar waveguides in a stacked uration along a first axis that is parallel with a direction
of the thicknesses of planar waveguides and along a second axis that is parallel with the
widths of the planar waveguides to form a three-dimensional array of planar waveguides.
There are at least three planar waveguides stacked in the direction of the first axis,
in one or more embodiments. There are at least three planar waveguides stacked in the
direction of the second axis, in one or more embodiments. There are at least three planar
waveguides stacked in the direction of the second axis, in one or more embodiments. The
successive planar waveguides in the stack along the first axis are immediately adjacent one
another, and successive planar waveguides in the stack along the second axis are
immediately adjacent one another, in one or more embodiments. The waveguide assembly
further comprises a plurality of reflective layers carried on at least one e of at least one
of the planar waveguides, in one or more embodiments.
The reflective layers include a completely reflective metalized coating. The
reflective layers include a wavelength specific reflector, in one or more embodiments. The
reflective layers separate the planar waveguides in each successive pair of the planar
waveguides along at least one of the first or the second axes, in one or more embodiments.
The reflective layers separate the planar waveguides in each successive pair of the planar
waveguides along both the first and the second axes, in one or more ments.
Each of a number of the planar waveguides respectively includes a number of
transverse reflective and/or diffractive surfaces that redirect at least a portion of the light
received by the respective planar waveguide transversely outward of the planar waveguide, in
one or more embodiments. The transverse tive and/or diffractive surfaces comprise
diffractive optical ts sandwiched in the respective planar waveguides between the
major faces of the tive planar waveguide, in one or more embodiments. The diffractive
l ts are selectively operable to vary a focal distance, in one or more
embodiments.
The first axis is a curved axis, and at least one of the major edges of each of the
planar waveguides in at least one set in the waveguide ly is oriented to focus on a
single line, the single line parallel to the lengths of the planar waveguides, in one or more
embodiments.
In one or more embodiments, a system for displaying virtual content to a user, the
system comprises a light projector to project light associated with one or more frames of image
data, n the light tor is a fiber scanning y, a waveguide assembly to variably
t light to a user’s eye, wherein the waveguide is curved concavely toward the eye, in one
or more embodiments.
The curved ide expands a field of view, in one or more ments. The
curved waveguide efficiently directs light to the user’s eye, in one or more embodiments. The
curved waveguide comprises a time-varying g, thereby creating an axis for scanning the
light for the fiber scanning display, in one or more embodiments.
In another embodiment, a system for displaying l content to a user, comprises
a transmissive beam splitter substrate having an entrance to receive light and a number of
internal reflective or diffractive es angled with respect to the entrance to redirect at least
a portion of the light ed at the ce transversely outward of the transmissive beam
splitter substrate toward an eye of the user, wherein the number of internal reflective or
diffractive surfaces includes a plurality of transverse reflective and/or diffractive surfaces
spaced along a longitudinal axis of the transmissive beam splitter substrate, each of the
transverse reflective and/or diffractive surfaces angled or angleable with respect to the
ce to redirect at least a portion of the light received at the entrance ersely outward
of the transmissive beam splitter substrate along an optical path toward an eye of the user, a
light generating system to transmit light to the issive beam splitter, and a local ller
communicatively coupled to the y system to provide image information to the display
system, the local controller comprising at least one processor, and at least one nontransitory
processor readable media communicatively coupled to the at least one processor, the at least
one nontransitory processor readable media which stores at last one of processor-executable
instructions or data, which when executed by the at least one processor causes the at least
one processor to at least one of process, cache, and store data and provide the image
information to the display to produce at least one of a virtual or an augment reality visual
experience to the user, in one or more embodiments.
The transverse reflective and/or diffractive surfaces comprise at least one diffractive
optical element (DOE), where a collimated beam that enters the beam splitter at a number of
defined angles is totally internally reflected along the length of thereof, and intersects the DOE
at one or more locations, in one or more ments. The at least one diffractive optical
element (DOE) comprises a first g, in one or more embodiments. The first grating is a
first Bragg grating, in one or more embodiments.
The DOE comprises a second grating, the first grating on a first plane and the
second grating on a second plane, the second plane spaced from the first plane such that the
first and the second gratings interact to produce a moire beat pattern, in one or more
embodiments. The first grating has a first pitch and the second grating has a second pitch, the
first pitch the same as the second pitch, in one or more embodiments. The first grating has a
first pitch and the second grating has a second pitch, the first pitch the different from the
second pitch, in one or more embodiments. The first grating pitch is controllable to change the
first g pitch over time, in one or more embodiments. The first grating ses an elastic
material and is subject to mechanical deformation in one or more embodiments.
The first grating is carried by an elastic material which is subject to mechanical
deformation, in one or more embodiments. The first grating pitch is controllable to change the
first grating pitch over time, in one or more embodiments. The second grating pitch is
controllable to change the second grating pitch over time, in one or more embodiments. The
first grating is an electro-active grating, having at least one ON state and an OFF state, in one
or more embodiments. The first grating comprises a polymer dispersed liquid l, a plurality
of liquid crystal ts of the polymer dispersed liquid crystal controllably ted to change
a refractive index of the first g, in one or more embodiments.
] The first grating is a time-varying grating wherein the first grating is a time-varying
grating, and the local controller controls at least the first g to expand a field of view of the
display, in one or more embodiments. The first grating is a time-varying grating, and the local
controller employs arying control of at least the first g to correction for a chromatic
aberration, in one or more embodiments. The local controller drives at least the first grating to
vary a placement of a red sub-pixel of a pixel of an image with respect to at least one of a blue
or a green sub-pixel of corresponding pixel of the image, in one or more embodiments. The
local controller drives at least the first grating to laterally shift an exit pattern to fill a gap in an
outbound image pattern, in one or more embodiments.
The at least one DOE element has a first circularly—symmetric term, in one or more
ments. The at least one DOE element has a first linear term, the first linear term
summed with the first circularly—symmetric term, in one or more embodiments. The circularly—
symmetric term is controllable, in one or more embodiments. The at least one DOE element
has a second first circularly—symmetric term, in one or more embodiments. The at least one
diffractive optical (DOE) element comprises a first DOE, in one or more embodiments. The
first DOE is a circular DOE, in one or more embodiments.
The circular DOE is a time-varying DOE, in one or more embodiments. The circular
DOE is layered in relation to a waveguide for focus modulation, in one or more embodiments.
A diffraction pattern of the circular DOE is static, in one or more embodiments. A diffraction
pattern of the circular DOE is dynamic, in one or more embodiments. The system comprises
additional circular DOEs, wherein the additional circular DOEs are positioned in relation to the
circular DOE, such that many focus levels are achieved h a small number of switchable
DOEs, in one or more embodiments.
The system further ses a matrix of switchable DOE elements, in one or
more ments. The matrix is utilized to expand a field of view, in one or more
embodiments. The matrix is ed to expand a size of an exit pupil, in one or more
ments.
] In one or more embodiments, a system for displaying virtual content to a user,
comprises a light projecting system to project light beams ated with one or more frames
of image data, a diffractive optical element (DOE) to receive the projected light beams and
deliver the light beams at a desired focus, wherein the DOE is a circular DOE, in one or more
embodiments.
The DOE is stretchable along a single axis to adjust an angle of a linear DOE term,
in one or more embodiments. The DOE comprises a membrane, and at least one transducer
operable to selectively vibrate the membrane with an oscillatory motion in a Z-axis to provide
Z-axis l and change of focus over time, in one or more ments. The DOE is
embedded in a stretchable medium, such that a pitch of the DOE can be adjusted by physically
stretching the medium, in one or more embodiments. The DOE is stretched biaxially, and
wherein the stretching of the DOE affects a focal length of the DOE, in one or more
embodiments. The system of claim 762, further comprising a plurality of circular DOEs,
wherein the DOEs are stacked along a Z axis, in one or more embodiments. A circular DOE is
layered in front of an waveguide for focus modulation. The system of claim 768, wherein the
DOE is static, in one or more ments.
] In one or more embodiments, a system for displaying l content to a user,
comprises a light projecting system to project light beams associated with one or more frames
of image data, a first waveguide without any diffractive optical elements (DOEs), the first
waveguide which propagates light ed by the first waveguide at a number of defined
angles along at least a portion of a length of the first waveguide via total internal reflection and
which provides the light externally from the first waveguide as collimated light, a second
waveguide with at least a first circularly-symmetric diffractive l element (DOE), the
second waveguide optically coupled to receive the collimated light from the first waveguide,
and a processor to control the gratings of the DOE, in one or more embodiments.
The first DOE is selectively controllable, in one or more embodiments. The display
comprises a ity of onal DOEs in addition to the first DOE, the DOEs arranged in a
stack configuration, in one or more embodiments. Each of the DOEs of the plurality of
additional DOEs is selectively controllable, in one or more embodiments. The local controller
controls the first DOE and the plurality of additional DOEs to dynamically modulate a focus of
light passing through the display, in one or more embodiments. The processor selectively
respectively switches the first DOE and the plurality of additional DOEs to realize a number of
focus levels, the number of realizable focus levels r than a total number of the DOEs in
the stack, in one or more embodiments.
Each of the DOES in the stack has a respective optical power, the optical power of
the DOES in the static controllable additive to one another, in one or more ments. The
respective optical power of at least one of the DOEs in the stack is twice the respective optical
power of at least one other of the DOEs in the stack, in one or more embodiments. The
processor selectively respectively es the first DOE and the plurality of additional DOEs
to modulate tive linear and radial terms of the DOEs over time, in one or more
embodiments. The processor selectively respectively switches the first DOE and the plurality of
additional DOEs on a frame sequential basis, in one or more embodiments.
The stack of DOEs comprises a stack of polymer dispersed liquid crystal ts.
In absence of an applied voltage, a host medium refraction index matches that of a set of
sed molecules of the polymer dispersed liquid crystal elements, in one or more
embodiments. The polymer dispersed liquid crystal elements comprise molecules of lithium
niobate, and a number of arent indium tin oxide layer electrode on either side of a host
medium, wherein the dispersed molecules of lithium niobate llably change index of
refraction and functionally form a diffraction pattern within the host medium, in one or more
embodiments.
] In another embodiment, a method for displaying virtual content, comprises
projecting light associated with one or more frames of image data to a user, receiving light at a
first waveguide, the first waveguide t any diffractive optical elements, and propagating
the light through internal reflection, receiving collimated light at a second waveguide with at
least a first circularly-symmetric diffractive optical element (DOE), the second waveguide
optically coupled to receive the collimated light from the first waveguide, n a grating of
the circularly symmetric DOE is varied, and wherein the first waveguide and second
waveguide are assembled in a stack of DOEs, in one or more embodiments.
In one or more embodiments, an optical element for displaying virtual content to a
user, comprises at least one diffractive optical element (DOE) positioned to receive light, the at
least one DOE comprising a first array of a plurality of separately addressable sections, with at
least one electrode for each of the separately addressable tion, each of the separately
addressable subsections responsive to at least one respective single received via the
respective at least one electrode to selectively switch between at least a first state and a
section state, the second state ent from the first state, in one or more ments.
] A field of view is expanded by lexing adjacently addressable subsections, in
one or more embodiments. The first state is an ON state and the second state is an OFF
state, in one or more embodiments. The each of the separately addressable subsections has a
respective set of at least two indium tin oxide electrodes, in one or more embodiments. The
first array of a plurality of separately addressable sections of the at least one DOE is a one-
ional array, in one or more embodiments. The first array of a plurality of separately
addressable sections of the at least one DOE is a two-dimensional array, in one or more
ments. The first array of separately addressable sections are sections of a first DOE
that resides on a first planar layer, in one or more embodiments.
The at least one DOE comprises at least second DOE, the second DOE
comprising a second array of a plurality of separately addressable sections, with at least one
electrode for each of the separately addressable subsection, each of the separately
addressable subsections responsive to at least one respective single received via the
tive at least one electrode to selectively switch between at least a first state and a
section state, the second state different from the first state, the second array of DOEs ng
on a second planar layer, the second planar layer in a d configuration with the first
planar layer, in one or more embodiments.
The at least one DOE ses at least third DOE, the third DOE comprising a
third array of a plurality of separately addressable sections, with at least one electrode for each
of the separately addressable subsection, each of the separately addressable subsections
responsive to at least one respective single received via the respective at least one electrode
to selectively switch between at least a first state and a section state, the second state different
from the first state, the third array of DOEs residing on a third planar layer, the third planar
layer in a stacked configuration with the first and the second planar layers, in one or more
embodiments.
The first array of separately addressable sections are embedded in a single planar
waveguide, in one or more embodiments. The local controller controls the separately
addressable subsections to selectively emit collimated light from the planar waveguide at a first
time and to emit a diverging light from the planar waveguide at a second time, the second time
different from the first time, in one or more embodiments. The local control ls the
separately addressable subsections to selectively emit light in a first ion from the planar
waveguide at a first time and to emit light in a second direction from the planar waveguide at
the first time, the second direction different from the first direction, in one or more
embodiments.
The local control controls the separately addressable subsections to selectively
scan light across a direction over time, in one or more embodiments. The local l controls
the separately addressable subsections to selectively focus light over time, in one or more
ments. The local l controls the separately addressable subsections to selectively
vary a field of view of an exit pupil over time, in one or more embodiments.
In one or more embodiments, a system comprises a first freeform tive and
lens optical component to increase a size of a field-of—view for a d set of optical
parameters, the first freeform reflective and lens optical component comprising: a first curved
surface, a second curved surface, and a third curved surface, the first curved surface at least
partially optically transmissive and refractive and which imparts a focal change to the light
received by the first freeform reflective and lens l component via the first curved surface,
the second curved surface which at least partially reflects light received by the second curved
surface from the first curved surface toward the third curved surface and which passes light
received by the second curved surface from the third curved surface, the third curved surface
which at least partially ts light out of the first freeform reflective and lens optical
component via the second curved surface, in one or more embodiments.
The first curved surface of the first freeform reflective and lens optical component is
a respective freeform curved surface, in one or more embodiments. The first curved surface of
the first freeform reflective and lens optical component adds a stigmatism to the light, in one or
more embodiments. The third curved surface of the first freeform reflective and lens optical
component adds an te stigmatism to cancel the stigmatism added by the first curved
surface of the first freeform reflective and lens optical component, in one or more
embodiments. The second curved surface of the first freeform reflective and lens l
ent is a respective freeform curved surface, in one or more embodiments. The second
curved surface of the first freeform reflective and lens optical component reflects defined
angles of light to be reflected by total internal reflection toward the third curved surface, in one
or more embodiments.
In one or more embodiments, a system comprises a fiber scanning display to
project light associated with one or more frames of image data, wherein the fiber scanning
display is configured to deliver the light to a first free form optical element, and a first freeform
reflective and lens optical component to increase a size of a field-of-view for a d set of
optical parameters, the first freeform tive and lens l component comprising: a first
curved surface, a second curved surface, and a third curved surface, the first curved surface at
least partially optically transmissive and refractive and which imparts a focal change to the light
received by the first freeform reflective and lens l component via the first curved surface,
the second curved surface which at least partially reflects light received by the second curved
surface from the first curved surface toward the third curved surface and which passes light
received by the second curved surface from the third curved surface, the third curved surface
which at least partially reflects light out of the first freeform reflective and lens l
ent via the second curved surface, in one or more embodiments.
] The freeform optic is a TIR freeform optic, in one or more embodiments. The
rm optic has iform thickness, in one or more embodiments. The freeform optic is a
wedge optic, in one or more embodiments. The freeform optic is a conic, in one or more
embodiments. The freeform optic corresponds to arbitrary , in one or more
embodiments.
In one or more ments, a system comprises an image generating source to
provide one or more frames of image data to be presented to a user, a display system to
provide light associated with the one or more frames of image data; and a free form optical
element to modify the provided light and deliver the light to the user, n the freeform optic
includes reflective coating, wherein the display system is configured to illuminate the rm
optical element with light such that a wavelength of the light matches a corresponding
wavelength of the reflective coating, in one or more embodiments.
] The one or more rm optical elements are tiled in relation to one r. The
one or more freeform optical elements are tiled along a z axis, in one or more embodiments.
In one or more embodiments, a system comprises an image generating source to
provide one or more frames of image data to be presented to a user; a display system to
provide light associated with the one or more frames of image data, wherein the display
system ses a plurality of microdisplays; and a free form optical element to modify the
provided light and deliver the light to the user, in one or more embodiments.
The one or more freeform optics are tiled in relation to one another. The light
projected by the plurality of microdisplays increases a field of view, in one or more
embodiments. The freeform optical elements are configured such that only one color is
delivered by a particular freeform optical element, in one or more embodiments. The tiled
freeform is a star shape, in one or more embodiments. The tiled freeform optical elements
increase a size of an exit pupil, in one or more embodiments. The system further comprises
another free form optical element, wherein the freeform optical element and stacked together
in a manner to create a uniform material thickness, in one or more embodiments. The system
r comprises r free form optical element, wherein the other optical element is
configured to capture light ponding to an outside environment, in one or more
embodiments.
The system further comprises a DMD, wherein the DMD is configured to occlude
one or more pixels, in one or more ments. The system further comprises one or more
LCDs. The system further comprises a contact lens substrate, wherein the freeform optics is
d to the contact lens substrate, in one or more embodiments. The plurality of
microdisplays provides an array of small exit pupils that in an aggregate form a functional
equivalent of a large exit pupil, in one or more embodiments.
The at least one image source includes at least a first romatic image source
that provides light of a first color, at least a second monochromatic image source that provides
light of a second color, the second color different from the first color, and at least a third
monochromatic image source that provides light of a third color, the third color different from
the first and the second colors, in one or more embodiments. The at least a first
monochromatic image source comprises a first subgroup of scanning fibers, the at least a
second monochromatic image source comprises a second subgroup of scanning fibers, and
the at least a third monochromatic image source comprises a third subgroup of scanning
, in one or more embodiments.
The system further comprises an occluder positioned in an l path between the
first freeform reflective and lens optical component and the at least one tor, the occluder
operable to selective occlude light on a by-pixel basis. The first freeform reflective and
lens optical component forms at least a portion of a contact lens. The system further comprises
a compensator lens optically d to a portion of the first freeform reflective and lens optical
component, in one or more embodiments.
In one or more embodiments, a system comprises a first freeform reflective and
lens optical component to increase a size of a field-of—view for a defined set of optical
parameters, the first freeform reflective and lens optical component sing: a first surface,
a second surface, and a third surface, the first surface at least lly optically transmissive to
light received by the first rm reflective and lens optical component via the first surface,
the second surface which is curved and at least partially reflects light received by the second
surface from the first surface toward the third surface and which passes light received by the
second surface from the curved e, the third surface which is curved and at least lly
reflects light out of the first freeform reflective and lens optical component via the second
surface, and a second freeform reflective and lens l component, the second freeform
reflective and lens l component comprising: a first surface, a second surface, and a third
surface, the first surface of the second freeform tive and lens optical component at least
partially optically transmissive to light received by the second freeform reflective and lens
optical component via the first surface, the second surface of the second freeform reflective
and lens optical component which is curved and at least partially reflects light received by the
second e from the first surface of the second freeform reflective and lens optical
component toward the third surface of the second rm reflective and lens optical
component and which passes light received by the second surface from the third surface of the
second freeform reflective and lens optical ent, the third surface of the second freeform
reflective and lens optical component which is curved and at least partially reflects light out of
the second freeform reflective and lens optical component via the second surface, wherein the
first and the second freeform reflective and lens l components are in an oppositely
oriented stacked configuration along a Z-axis, in one or more embodiments.
The second surface of the second freeform tive and lens optical component is
adjacent the third surface of the first freeform reflective and lens optical component, in one or
more embodiments. The second e of the second rm reflective and lens optical
ent is concave and the third surface of the first freeform reflective and lens optical
component is convex, that the third surface of the first freeform reflective and lens optical
component closely receives the second surface of the second freeform reflective and lens
optical component, in one or more ments. The first surface of the first freeform
tive and lens optical component is flat and the first surface of the second freeform
reflective and lens optical component is flat, and further comprises at least a first projector
lly coupled to the first freeform reflective and lens optical component via the first surface
of the first freeform reflective and lens optical component; and at least a second projector
optically coupled to the second freeform reflective and lens l component via the first
surface of the second freeform reflective and lens optical component, in one or more
embodiments.
The system further comprises at least one wavelength selective material carried by
at least one of the first or the second rm tive and lens optical components, in one or
more embodiments. The system further comprises at least a first wavelength ive material
carried by the first freeform reflective and lens optical components, at least a second
wavelength selective material carried by the second rm reflective and lens optical
components, the first wavelength selective material selective of a first set of wavelengths and
the second wavelength ive material selective of a second set of wavelengths, the second
set of wavelengths different from the first set of wavelengths, in one or more ments.
The system further comprises at least a first polarizer carried by the first freeform
reflective and lens optical components, at least a second polarizer carried by the second
freeform reflective and lens optical components, the first polarizer having a different
polarization orientation than the second polarizer, in one or more embodiments.
The l fiber cores are in the same fiber cladding, in one or more embodiments.
The optical fiber cores are in separate fiber claddings, in one or more embodiments. The
accommodation module tracks accommodation indirectly, by tracking the vergence or gaze of
the user’s eyes, in one or more embodiments. The partially reflective mirror has relatively high
reflectance for the polarization of light provided by the light source, and relative low tance
for the other polarization states of light provided by the e world, in one or more
embodiments. The plurality of partially reflective mirrors comprises a dielectric coating, in one
or more embodiments. The plurality of reflective mirrors has relatively high reflectance for the
waveguides for the wavelengths of light provided by the light , and relatively low
reflectance for the other waveguides of light provided by the outside world, in one or more
embodiments. The VFE is a deformable mirror, the surface shape of which can be varied over
time, in one or more embodiments. The VFE is an electrostatically actuated membrane mirror,
and wherein the waveguide or an additional transparent layer comprises one or more
substantially transparent electrodes, and wherein a voltage applied to the one or more
electrodes electrostatically deforms the ne mirror, in one or more embodiments, in one
or more ments. The light source is a scanned light display, and wherein the VFE varies
the focus on a line segment basis, in one or more embodiments. The waveguide comprises an
exit pupil ion function, wherein an input ray of light is split and outcoupled as multiple
rays of light exiting the waveguide at multiple locations, in one or more ments. The
image data is scaled by a processor in accordance with and to compensate for changing
l image magnification, before the waveguide receives the one or more light patterns,
such that the image magnification appears to remain ntially fixed while adjusting focus
level, in one or more embodiments.
In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content comprises an
image-generating source to provide one or more frames of image data in a time-sequential
manner, a display ly to project light rays associated with the one or more frames of
image data, the display assembly comprises a first display element corresponding to a first
frame-rate and a first bit depth, and a second display element corresponding to a second
frame-rate and a second bit depth, and a variable focus element (VFE) configurable to vary a
focus of the projected light and transmit the light to the user’s eye.
In yet another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content comprises an
array of optical fibers to it light beams associated with an image to be presented to a
user, and a lens coupled to the array of the optical fibers to deflect a plurality of light beams
output by the array of optical fibers through a single nodal point, wherein the lens is physically
attached to the optical fibers such that a movement of the optical fiber causes the lens to move,
and wherein the single nodal point is scanned.
In another embodiment, a virtual reality y system comprises a plurality of
optical fibers to te light beams associated with one or more images to be presented to a
user, and a plurality of phase modulators coupled to the plurality of optical fibers to modulate
the light beams, wherein the plurality of phase tors modulate the light in a manner that
affects a ont generated as a result of the plurality of light beams.
In one embodiment, a system for ying l content to a user comprises a
light projection system to project light associated with one or more frames of image data to a
user’s eyes, the light project system configured to project light corresponding to a plurality of
pixels associated with the image data and a processor to modulate a size of the plurality of
pixels displayed to the user.
In one embodiment, a system of displaying virtual content to a user, ses an
image-generating source to provide one or more frames of image data, a mu|ticore assembly
comprising a plurality of mu|ticore fibers to project light associated with the one or more frames
of image data, a mu|ticore fiber of the plurality of mu|ticore fibers emitting light in a wavefront,
such that the mu|ticore assembly produces an aggregate wavefront of the projected light, and a
phase modulator to induce phase delays between the ore fibers in a manner such that the
aggregate wavefront d by the ore assembly is varied, thereby varying a focal
distance at which the user perceives the one or more frames of image data.
In another embodiment, a system for displaying virtual content to a user comprises
an array of microprojectors to project light beams associated with one or more frames of image
data to be presented to the user, n the microprojector is configurable to be movable
relative to one or more microprojectors of the array of the microprojectors,
a frame to house the array of microprojectors, a processor operatively coupled to the one or
more rojectors of the array of microprojectors to control one or more light beams
transmitted from the one or more projectors in a manner such that the one or more light beams
are modulated as a function of a position of the one or more microprojectors relative to the
array of rojectors, thereby enabling delivery of a lightfield image to the user.
Additional and other objects, features, and advantages of the invention are
described in the detail description, s and claims.
BRIEF PTION OF THE DRAWINGS
Fig. 1 illustrates a user’s view of augmented reality (AR) through a wearable AR
user device, in one illustrated embodiment.
Figs. 2A—2E rates various embodiments of wearable AR devices.
Fig. 3 illustrates a cross-sectional view of the human eye, in one illustrated
embodiment.
] Figs. 4A -4D illustrate one or more embodiments of various internal processing
components of the wearable AR device.
Figs. 5A—5H illustrate embodiments of transmitting focused light to a user through a
transmissive beamsplitter substrate.
Figs. 6A and 6B rate ments of coupling a lens element with the
transmissive beamsplitter substrate of Figs. 5A-5H.
Figs. 7A and 7B illustrate embodiments of using one or more waveguides to it
light to a user.
Figs. 8A-SQ illustrate embodiments of a diffractive optical element (DOE).
Figs 9A and 9B illustrate a wavefront produced from a light projector, according to
one illustrated embodiment.
Fig. 10 illustrates an embodiment of a stacked configuration of multiple transmissive
beamsplitter substrate coupled with l elements, according to one illustrated embodiment.
Figs 11A-11C illustrate a set of ts projected into a user’s pupil, according to
the illustrated embodiments.
Figs. 12A and 12B illustrate configurations of an array of microprojectors, according
to the illustrated embodiments.
Figs. 13A—13M illustrate embodiments of coupling microprojectors with optical
elements, according to the illustrated embodiments.
Figs. 14A— 14F illustrate embodiments of spatial light modulators coupled with
optical elements, according to the rated embodiments.
Figs. 15A—15C illustrate the use of a wedge type ides along with a plurality of
light sources, according to the rated embodiments.
Figs. 16A—16O rate embodiments of ng optical elements to optical fibers,
according to the illustrated ments.
Fig. 17 rates a notch filter, according to one illustrated embodiment.
Fig. 18 rates a spiral pattern of a fiber scanning display, according to one
illustrated embodiment.
] Figs. 19A—19N illustrate occlusion s in presenting a darkfield to a user,
according to the illustrated embodiments.
Figs. 20A—200 illustrate embodiments of various waveguide assemblies, according
to the illustrated embodiments.
Figs. 21A—21 N illustrate various configurations of DOEs coupled to other optical
ts, according to the illustrated embodiments.
Figs. 22A—22Y illustrate s configurations of freeform optics, according to the
illustrated embodiments.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
Referring to Figures 4A—4D, some general componentry options are rated. In
the portions of the detailed ption which follow the discussion of Figures 4A—4D, various
systems, subsystems, and components are presented for addressing the objectives of
providing a high-quality, comfortably-perceived display system for human VR and/or AR.
As shown in Figure 4A, an AR system user (60) is depicted wearing a frame (64)
structure coupled to a display system (62) positioned in front of the eyes of the user. A speaker
(66) is coupled to the frame (64) in the depicted configuration and positioned adjacent the ear
canal of the user (in one embodiment, another speaker, not shown, is positioned adjacent the
other ear canal of the user to provide for stereo / shapeable sound l). The display (62) is
operatively coupled (68), such as by a wired lead or wireless connectivity, to a local processing
and data module (70) which may be mounted in a variety of configurations, such as y
attached to the frame (64), fixedly attached to a helmet or hat (80) as shown in the embodiment
of Figure 4B, embedded in headphones, removably attached to the torso (82) of the user (60) in
a ck-style configuration as shown in the embodiment of Figure 4C, or removably
attached to the hip (84) of the user (60) in a belt-coupling style configuration as shown in the
embodiment of Figure 4D.
The local processing and data module (70) may comprise a power-efficient
processor or controller, as well as digital memory, such as flash memory, both of which may be
utilized to assist in the processing, caching, and storage of data a) captured from sensors which
may be ively coupled to the frame (64), such as image capture devices (such as
cameras), hones, inertial measurement units, accelerometers, compasses, GPS units,
radio devices, and/or gyros; and/or b) acquired and/or processed using the remote processing
module (72) and/or remote data repository (74), possibly for passage to the display (62) after
such processing or val. The local processing and data module (70) may be operatively
coupled (76, 78), such as via a wired or wireless communication links, to the remote sing
module (72) and remote data repository (74) such that these remote s (72, 74) are
operatively coupled to each other and available as resources to the local processing and data
module (70). In one embodiment, the remote processing module (72) may se one or
more vely powerful processors or controllers configured to analyze and process data
and/or image information. In one embodiment, the remote data repository (74) may comprise a
relatively large-scale digital data storage facility, which may be available through the internet or
other king configuration in a “cloud” resource configuration. In one embodiment, all data
is stored and all computation is performed in the local sing and data module, allowing
fully autonomous use from any remote modules.
Referring to Figures 5A through 22Y, various display configurations are presented
that are designed to present the human eyes with photon-based radiation patterns that can be
comfortably perceived as augmentations to physical reality, with evels of image quality
and three-dimensional perception, as well as being capable of ting two-dimensional
content.
Referring to Figure 5A, in a fied example, a transmissive beamsplitter
ate (104) with a 45-degree reflecting surface (102) s incoming radiation (106), which
may be output from a lens (not shown), through the pupil (45) of the eye (58) and to the retina
(54). The field of view for such a system is limited by the geometry of the beamsplitter (104).
To accommodate the desire to have comfortable viewing with minimal hardware, in one
embodiment, a larger field of view can be created by aggregating the outputs/reflections of
various different reflective and/or diffractive surfaces and using, e.g., a frame-sequential
configuration n eye (58) is presented with a ce of frames at high ncy that
provides the perception of a single coherent scene. As an alternative to, or in addition to,
presenting different image data via ent reflectors in a time-sequential fashion, the
reflectors may separate content by other means, such as polarization selectivity or wavelength
ivity. In on to being capable of relaying two-dimensional images, the reflectors can
relay the dimensional wavefronts associated with true-three-dimensional viewing of actual
physical objects.
Referring to Figure 5B, a substrate (108) comprising a plurality of reflectors at a
plurality of angles (110) is shown, with each reflector ly ting in the depicted
configuration for illustrative purposes. The reflectors may be switchable elements to facilitate
temporal selectivity. In one embodiment, the reflective surfaces would intentionally be
sequentially activated with frame-sequential input information (106), in which each reflective
e ts a narrow field of view sub-image which is tiled with other narrow field of view
sub-images presented by the other reflective surfaces to form a composite wide field of view
image. For example, referring to Figures 5C, 5D, and 5E, surface (110), about in the middle of
substrate (108), is switched “on” to a reflecting state, such that it reflects incoming image
information (106) to present a relatively narrow field of view sub-image in the middle of a larger
field of view, while the other potential reflective surfaces are in a transmissive state.
Referring to Figure 5C, incoming image information (106) coming from the right of
the narrow field of view sub-image (as shown by the angle of incoming beams 106 relative to
the substrate 108 input interface 112, and the resultant angle at which they exit the substrate
108) is reflected toward the eye (58) from reflective surface (110). Figure 5D illustrates the
same reflector (110) active, with image information coming from the middle of the narrow field
of view sub-image, as shown by the angle of the input information (106) at the input interface
(112) and its angle as it exits substrate (108). Figure 5E illustrates the same reflector (110)
active, with image information coming from the left of the field of view, as shown by the angle of
the input ation (106) at the input interface (112) and the resultant exit angle at the surface
of the substrate (108). Figure 5F illustrates a configuration wherein the bottom reflector (110) is
active, with image ation (106) coming in from the far right of the overall field of view. For
example, Figures 5C, 5D, and 5E can illustrate one frame representing the center of a framesequential
tiled image, and Figure 5F can illustrate a second frame representing the far right of
that tiled image.
In one ment, the light carrying the image information (106) may strike the
reflective surface (110) ly after entering substrate (108) at input ace (112), without
first reflecting from the surfaces of substrate (108). In one embodiment, the light carrying the
image information (106) may reflect from one or more surfaces of substrate (108) after entering
at input interface (112) and before striking the reflective surface (110); for instance, substrate
(108) may act as a planar waveguide, propagating the light carrying image information (106) by
total internal reflection. Light may also reflect from one or more surfaces of the substrate (108)
from a partially reflective g, a wavelength-selective coating, an angle-selective coating,
and/or a polarization-selective coating.
In one embodiment, the angled reflectors may be constructed using an electro-
active material, such that upon application of a voltage and/or current to a particular reflector,
the refractive index of the material comprising such reflector changes from an index
substantially matched to the rest of the substrate (108), in which case the reflector is in a
transmissive configuration, to a tive configuration wherein the refractive index of the
reflector mismatches the refractive index of the substrate (108) such that a reflection effect is
created. Example electro-active material includes m niobate and electro-active rs.
Suitable substantially transparent electrodes for controlling a plurality of such reflectors may
se materials such as indium tin oxide, which is utilized in liquid crystal displays.
In one embodiment, the electro-active reflectors (110) may comprise liquid crystal,
embedded in a substrate (108) host medium such as glass or plastic. In some variations, liquid
crystal may be selected that changes refractive index as a on of an applied electric signal,
so that more analog changes may be accomplished as opposed to binary (from one
transmissive state to one reflective state). In an embodiment wherein 6 sub-images are to be
presented to the eye frame-sequential to form a large tiled image with an overall refresh rate of
60 frames per second, it is desirable to have an input display that can refresh at the rate of
about 360 Hz, with an electro-active reflector array that can keep up with such frequency. In
one embodiment, lithium niobate may be utilized as an electro-active reflective material as
opposed to liquid crystal; lithium niobate is utilized in the photonics industry for high-speed
switches and fiber optic ks and has the capability to switch refractive index in response
to an applied e at a very high ncy; this high frequency may be used to steer line-
tial or pixel-sequential sub-image information, especially if the input display is a scanned
light display, such as a fiber-scanned display or scanning mirror-based display.
In another embodiment, a variable switchable angled mirror configuration may
comprise one or more high-speed mechanically repositionable reflective surfaces, such as a
MEMS -electro-mechanical system) device. A MEMS device may include what is known
as a “digital mirror device”, or “DMD”, (often part of a “digital light processing”, or “DLP” system,
such as those available from Texas Instruments, Inc). In another electromechanical
embodiment, a plurality of air-gapped (or in vacuum) reflective surfaces could be mechanically
moved in and out of place at high ncy. In another electromechanical embodiment, a
single reflective surface may be moved up and down and re-pitched at very high frequency.
Referring to Figure 5G, it is notable that the switchable variable angle reflector
configurations described herein are capable of passing not only collimated or flat wavefront
information to the retina (54) of the eye (58), but also curved wavefront (122) image
information, as shown in the illustration of Figure 5G. This generally is not the case with other
waveguide-based configurations, wherein total internal reflection of curved wavefront
information causes undesirable complications, and therefore the inputs generally must be
collimated. The y to pass curved wavefront information facilitates the ability of
configurations such as those shown in Figures 5B-5H to provide the retina (54) with input
perceived as focused at various distances from the eye (58), notjust optical infinity (which
would be the interpretation of collimated light absent other cues).
Referring to Figure 5H, in another embodiment, an array of static partially reflective
surfaces (116) (Le, always in a reflective mode; in r embodiment, they may be o-
active, as above) may be ed in a substrate (1 14) with a high-frequency gating layer
(118) controlling outputs to the eye (58) by only allowing transmission through an aperture
(120) which is controllably movable. In other words, everything may be ively blocked
except for transmissions h the aperture (120). The gating layer (1 18) may comprise a
liquid crystal array, a lithium niobate array, an array of MEMS shutter elements, an array of DLP
DMD elements, or an array of other MEMS devices configured to pass or transmit with
vely high-frequency switching and high transmissibility upon being ed to
transmission mode.
ing to Figures 6A—6B, other embodiments are depicted wherein arrayed optical
ts may be combined with exit pupil expansion urations to assist with the comfort of
the virtual or augmented reality experience of the user. With a larger “exit pupil” for the optics
configuration, the user’s eye positioning relative to the display (which, as in Figures 4A—4D, may
be d on the user’s head in an eyeglasses sort of configuration) is not as likely to disrupt
his experience — because due to the larger exit pupil of the system, there is a larger acceptable
area wherein the user’s anatomical pupil may be located to still receive the information from the
display system as desired. In other words, with a larger exit pupil, the system is less likely to be
sensitive to slight misalignments of the display relative to the user’s anatomical pupil, and
greater comfort for the user may be ed h less geometric constraint on his or her
relationship with the display/glasses.
As shown in Figure 6A, the display (140) on the left feeds a set of parallel rays into
the substrate (124). In one embodiment, the display may be a scanned fiber display scanning a
narrow beam of light back and forth at an angle as shown to project an image through the lens
or other optical element (142), which may be utilized to collect the angularly-scanned light and
convert it to a parallel bundle of rays. The rays may be reflected from a series of reflective
es (126, 128, 130, 132, 134, 136) which may be configured to partially reflect and
partially transmit incoming light so that the light may be shared across the group of reflective
surfaces (126, 128, 130, 132, 134, 136) approximately equally. With a small lens (138) placed
at each exit point from the waveguide (124), the exiting light rays may be steered through a
nodal point and scanned out toward the eye (58) to provide an array of exit pupils, or the
functional equivalent of one large exit pupil that is usable by the user as he or she gazes toward
the display system.
For virtual reality configurations n it is desirable to also be able to see through
the waveguide to the real world (144), a similar set of lenses (139) may be presented on the
opposite side of the waveguide (124) to sate for the lower set of lenses; thus ng a
the equivalent of a zero-magnification ope. The reflective surfaces (126, 128, 130, 132,
134, 136) each may be aligned at approximately 45 degrees as shown, or may be configured to
have different alignments, akin to the configurations of s 5B-5H, for example). The
reflective surfaces (126, 128, 130, 132, 134, 136) may comprise wavelength-selective
tors, band pass reflectors, half silvered mirrors, or other reflective configurations. The
lenses (138, 139) shown are refractive lenses, but diffractive lens elements may also be
utilized.
Referring to Figure 6B, a somewhat similar configuration is depicted wherein a
plurality of curved reflective surfaces (148, 150, 152, 154, 156, 158) may be ed to
effectively combine the lens (element 138 of Figure 6A) and tor (elements 126, 128, 130,
132, 134, 136 of Figure 6A) functionality of the ment of Figure 6A, thereby obviating the
need for the two groups of lenses (element 138 of Figure 6A). The curved reflective surfaces
(148, 150, 152, 154, 156, 158) may be various curved configurations ed to both reflect
and impart angular change, such as parabolic or elliptical curved surfaces. With a parabolic
shape, a parallel set of incoming rays will be ted into a single output point; with an
ical configuration, a set of rays diverging from a single point of origin are collected to a
single output point. As with the configuration of Figure 6A, the curved reflective surfaces (148,
150, 152, 154, 156, 158) ably are configured to partially reflect and partially transmit so
that the ng light is shared across the length of the waveguide (146). The curved
reflective surfaces (148, 150, 152, 154, 156, 158) may comprise wavelength-selective notch
reflectors, half silvered mirrors, or other reflective configurations. In another embodiment, the
curved reflective surfaces (148, 150, 152, 154, 156, 158) may be replaced with ctive
reflectors configured to reflect and also deflect.
Referring to Figure 7A, perceptions of Z-axis ence (i.e., distance straight out
from the eye along the optical axis) may be facilitated by using a waveguide in conjunction with
a variable focus optical t configuration. As shown in Figure 7A, image information from
a display (160) may be collimated and injected into a waveguide (164) and distributed in a large
exit pupil manner using, e.g., configurations such as those described in reference to s
6A and 6B, or other substrate-guided optics methods known to those skilled in the art — and
then variable focus optical element capability may be utilized to change the focus of the
wavefront of light emerging from the waveguide and provide the eye with the perception that
the light coming from the waveguide (164) is from a particular focal distance. In other words,
since the incoming light has been collimated to avoid challenges in total internal reflection
waveguide urations, it will exit in collimated fashion, requiring a viewer’s eye to
accommodate to the far point to bring it into focus on the , and naturally be reted as
being from optical infinity — unless some other intervention causes the light to be refocused and
perceived as from a different viewing distance; one suitable such intervention is a variable
focus lens.
In the embodiment of Figure 7A, collimated image information is injected into a
piece of glass (162) or other material at an angle such that it totally ally reflects and is
passed into the adjacent waveguide (164). The waveguide (164) may be configured akin to the
waveguides of Figures 6A or 6B (124, 146, respectively) so that the collimated light from the
display is distributed to exit somewhat uniformly across the bution of reflectors or
diffractive features along the length of the waveguide. Upon exit toward the eye (58), in the
depicted configuration the exiting light is passed through a variable focus lens element (166)
wherein, depending upon the lled focus of the variable focus lens element (166), the light
exiting the variable focus lens element (166) and entering the eye (58) will have various levels
of focus (a collimated flat wavefront to represent l infinity, more and more beam
divergence / wavefront curvature to represent closer viewing distance relative to the eye 58).
To compensate for the variable focus lens element (166) between the eye (58) and
the waveguide (164), another similar variable focus lens element (167) is placed on the
opposite side of the waveguide (164) to cancel out the optical effects of the lenses (166) for
light coming from the world (144) for augmented reality (i.e., as described above, one lens
compensates for the other, producing the functional equivalent of a zero-magnification
telescope).
The variable focus lens element (166) may be a refractive element, such as a liquid
crystal lens, an electro-active lens, a conventional tive lens with moving ts, a
mechanical-deformation-based lens (such as a fluid-filled membrane lens, or a lens akin to the
human crystalline lens wherein a flexible t is flexed and relaxed by actuators), an
electrowetting lens, or a plurality of fluids with different refractive indices. The le focus
lens element (166) may also comprise a switchable diffractive optical element (such as one
ing a polymer dispersed liquid crystal approach n a host medium, such as a
polymeric material, has microdroplets of liquid crystal dispersed within the material; when a
voltage is applied, the molecules reorient so that their refractive s no longer match that of
the host medium, thereby creating a high-frequency switchable diffraction pattern).
One embodiment includes a host medium in which microdroplets of a Kerr effect-
based electro-active material, such as lithium niobate, is dispersed within the host medium,
enabling sing of image information on a pixel-by—pixel or line-by-line basis, when coupled
with a scanning light y, such as a fiber-scanned display or scanning-mirror-based y.
In a variable focus lens element (166) configuration n liquid l, lithium niobate, or
other technology is utilized to t a pattern, the pattern spacing may be modulated to not
only change the focal power of the variable focus lens element (166), but also to change the
focal power of the overall optical system — for a zoom lens type of functionality.
In one embodiment, the lenses (166) could be telecentric, in that focus of the display
imagery can be altered while keeping magnification constant — in the same way that a
photography zoom lens may be configured to decouple focus from zoom position. In another
embodiment, the lenses (166) may be non-telecentric, so that focus changes will also slave
zoom changes. With such a configuration, such magnification s may be compensated
for in software with dynamic g of the output from the graphics system in sync with focus
changes).
Referring back to the projector or other video y unit (160) and the issue of how
to feed images into the optical display system, in a “frame sequential” configuration, a stack of
sequential two-dimensional images may be fed to the display tially to produce three-
dimensional perception over time; in a manner akin to the manner in which a computed
tomography system uses d image slices to represent a three-dimensional ure. A
series of two-dimensional image slices may be presented to the eye, each at a different focal
distance to the eye, and the eye/brain would integrate such a stack into a perception of a
coherent three-dimensional volume. Depending upon the y type, line-by-line, or even
pixel-by-pixel sequencing may be conducted to produce the perception of three-dimensional
viewing. For example, with a scanned light display (such as a scanning fiber display or
ng mirror display), then the display is ting the waveguide (164) with one line or
one pixel at a time in a sequential fashion.
If the variable focus lens element (166) is able to keep up with the high-frequency of
pixel-by-pixel or line-by-line presentation, then each line or pixel may be presented and
dynamically focused through the variable focus lens element (166) to be perceived at a different
focal distance from the eye (58). Pixel-by—pixel focus modulation generally requires an
extremely fast/ high-frequency variable focus lens element (166). For example, a 1080P
resolution display with an overall frame rate of 60 frames per second typically presents around
125 million pixels per second. Such a configuration also may be constructed using a solid state
switchable lens, such as one using an electro-active material, e.g., lithium niobate or an electro-
active polymer. In on to its compatibility with the system illustrated in Figure 7A, a frame
sequential multi-focal display driving approach may be used in conjunction with a number of the
display system and optics embodiments described in this disclosure.
Referring to Figure 7B, with an electro-active layer (172) (such as one comprising
liquid crystal or lithium niobate) surrounded by onal electrodes (170, 174) which may be
made of indium tin oxide, a waveguide (168) with a conventional issive ate (176,
such as one made from glass or plastic with known total internal reflection teristics and
an index of refraction that matches the on or off state of the electro-active layer 172) may be
controlled such that the paths of entering beams may be dynamically altered to essentially
create a time-varying light field.
Referring to Figure 8A, a stacked waveguide assembly (178) may be utilized to
provide three-dimensional tion to the eye/brain by having a plurality of ides (182,
184, 186, 188, 190) and a plurality of weak lenses (198, 196, 194, 192) configured togetherto
send image information to the eye with various levels of wavefront curvature for each
waveguide level indicative of focal distance to be perceived for that waveguide level. A ity
of displays (200, 202, 204, 206, 208), or in another embodiment a single multiplexed display,
may be utilized to inject collimated image information into the waveguides (182, 184, 186, 188,
190), each of which may be configured, as described above, to distribute incoming light
substantially equally across the length of each waveguide, for exit down toward the eye.
] The waveguide (182) t the eye is configured to deliver collimated light, as
ed into such waveguide (182), to the eye, which may be representative of the optical
infinity focal plane. The next waveguide up (184) is configured to send out collimated light
which passes through the first weak lens (192; e.g., a weak negative lens) before it can reach
the eye (58); such first weak lens (192) may be configured to create a slight convex wavefront
curvature so that the eye/brain rets light coming from that next waveguide up (184) as
coming from a first focal plane closer inward toward the person from optical infinity. Similarly,
the third up waveguide (186) passes its output light through both the first (192) and second
(194) lenses before reaching the eye (58); the combined optical power of the first (192) and
second (194) lenses may be configured to create another incremental amount of wavefront
ence so that the eye/brain interprets light coming from that third waveguide up (186) as
coming from a second focal plane even closer inward toward the person from optical infinity
than was light from the next waveguide up (184).
The other waveguide layers (188, 190) and weak lenses (196, 198) are similarly
configured, with the highest waveguide (190) in the stack sending its output through all of the
weak lenses between it and the eye for an aggregate focal power representative of the closest
focal plane to the person. To compensate forthe stack of lenses (198, 196, 194, 192) when
viewing/interpreting light coming from the world (144) on the other side of the stacked
waveguide assembly (178), a compensating lens layer (180) is disposed at the top of the stack
to sate for the ate power of the lens stack (198, 196, 194, 192) below. Such a
configuration provides as many perceived focal planes as there are ble waveguide/lens
pairings, again with a relatively large exit pupil configuration as bed above. Both the
reflective aspects of the waveguides and the focusing aspects of the lenses may be static (i.e.,
not dynamic or electro-active). In an alternative ment they may be dynamic using
o-active features as described above, enabling a small number of waveguides to be
multiplexed in a time sequential fashion to produce a larger number of ive focal planes.
Referring to Figures 8B-8N, various aspects of diffraction configurations for focusing
and/or redirecting collimated beams are depicted. Other aspects of diffraction systems for such
purposes are disclosed in US. Patent Application Serial No. 61/845,907 (US Patent
ation No. 14/331,218), which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. Referring
to Figure 8B, passing a collimated beam through a linear diffraction pattern (210), such as a
Bragg grating, will deflect, or “steer”, the beam. Passing a collimated beam through a radially
symmetric diffraction pattern (212), or “Fresnel zone plate”, will change the focal point of the
beam. Figure 8C illustrates the tion effect of passing a collimated beam through a linear
ction pattern (210); Figure 8D illustrates the focusing effect of passing a collimated beam
through a radially symmetric diffraction pattern (212).
Referring to s 8E and 8F, a combination diffraction pattern that has both linear
and radial elements (214) produces both deflection and focusing of a collimated input beam.
These deflection and focusing s can be produced in a reflective as well as transmissive
mode. These principles may be applied with waveguide urations to allow for additional
optical system control, as shown in Figures 8G-8N, for example. As shown in Figures 8G-8N, a
diffraction pattern (220), or “diffractive optical element” (or “DOE”) has been embedded within a
planar waveguide (216) such that as a collimated beam is totally ally reflected along the
planar waveguide (216), it intersects the diffraction pattern (220) at a multiplicity of locations.
Preferably, the DOE (220) has a relatively low diffraction efficiency so that only a
portion of the light of the beam is deflected away toward the eye (58) with each intersection of
the DOE (220) while the rest ues to move through the planar waveguide (216) via total
internal reflection; the light carrying the image information is thus divided into a number of
related light beams that exit the waveguide at a multiplicity of locations and the result is a fairly
uniform pattern of exit emission toward the eye (58) for this particular collimated beam
bouncing around within the planar waveguide (216), as shown in Figure 8H. The exit beams
toward the eye (58) are shown in Figure 8H as substantially parallel, because, in this case, the
DOE (220) has only a linear diffraction pattern. As shown in the comparison between Figures
8L, 8M, and 8N, s to this linear diffraction pattern pitch may be utilized to controllably
deflect the exiting parallel beams, thereby ing a scanning or tiling onality.
Referring back to Figure 8|, with s in the radially symmetric diffraction
pattern ent of the ed DOE (220), the exit beam pattern is more divergent, which
would require the eye to accommodation to a closer distance to bring it into focus on the retina
and would be interpreted by the brain as light from a viewing distance closer to the eye than
optical infinity. Referring to Figure 8J, with the addition of another waveguide (218) into which
the beam may be injected (by a projector or display, for example), a DOE (221) embedded in
this other waveguide (218), such as a linear diffraction pattern, may function to spread the light
across the entire larger planar waveguide (216), which functions to provide the eye (58) with a
very large incoming field of incoming light that exits from the larger planar ide (216), Le,
a large eye box, in accordance with the particular DOE configurations at work.
The DOES (220, 221) are depicted bisecting the associated waveguides (216, 218)
but this need not be the case; they could be placed closer to, or upon, either side of either of
the waveguides (216, 218) to have the same functionality. Thus, as shown in Figure 8K, with
the injection of a single collimated beam, an entire field of cloned collimated beams may be
ed toward the eye (58). In addition, with a combined linear diffraction pattern / radially
symmetric diffraction n scenario such as that depicted in Figures 8F (214) and 8| (220), a
beam distribution waveguide optic (for functionality such as exit pupil functional expansion;
with a configuration such as that of Figure 8K, the exit pupil can be as large as the optical
element itself, which can be a very significant advantage for user comfort and mics) with
Z-axis focusing capability is presented, in which both the divergence angle of the cloned beams
and the wavefront curvature of each beam represent light coming from a point closer than
optical ty.
In one embodiment, one or more DOEs are able between “on” states in
which they actively ct, and “off” states in which they do not significantly diffract. For
instance, a switchable DOE may comprise a layer of polymer dispersed liquid l, in which
microdroplets comprise a ction pattern in a host medium, and the refractive index of the
microdroplets can be switched to substantially match the refractive index of the host al (in
which case the pattern does not appreciably diffract incident light) or the microdroplet can be
switched to an index that does not match that of the host medium (in which case the pattern
actively diffracts incident . Further, with dynamic changes to the diffraction terms, such as
the linear diffraction pitch term as in Figures 8L-8N, a beam scanning or tiling functionality may
be achieved. As noted above, it is desirable to have a relatively low diffraction grating
efficiency in each of the DOEs (220, 221) because it tates distribution of the light, and also
because light coming through the waveguides that is desirably transmitted (for example, light
coming from the world 144 toward the eye 58 in an augmented reality configuration) is less
affected when the diffraction efficiency of the DOE that it crosses (220) is lower — so a better
view of the real world through such a configuration is achieved.
Configurations such as those illustrated in Figure 8K preferably are driven with
ion of image information in a time sequential approach, with frame sequential driving being
the most straightforward to implement. For example, an image of the sky at optical infinity may
be injected at time1 and the diffraction grating ing collimation of light may be utilized; then
an image of a closer tree branch may be injected at time2 while a DOE controllably imparts a
focal change, say one diopter or 1 meter away, to e the eye/brain with the perception that
the branch light information is coming from the closer focal range. This kind of paradigm can
be repeated in rapid time sequential fashion such that the eye/brain perceives the input to be all
part of the same image. This isjust a two focal plane example; preferably the system will be
ured to have more focal planes to provide a smoother transition between objects and
their focal distances. This kind of configuration generally assumes that the DOE is switched at
a relatively low speed (i.e., in sync with the frame-rate of the display that is ing the images
— in the range of tens to ds of cycles/second).
The opposite extreme may be a configuration wherein DOE elements can shift focus
at tens to hundreds of MHz or greater, which facilitates switching of the focus state of the DOE
elements on a pixel-by—pixel basis as the pixels are scanned into the eye (58) using a scanned
light display type of approach. This is desirable because it means that the overall display
frame-rate can be kept quite low; just low enough to make sure that “flicker” is not a problem
(in the range of about 60-120 /sec).
In between these ranges, if the DOEs can be ed at KHz rates, then on a line-
by-line basis the focus on each scan line may be adjusted, which may afford the user with a
visible benefit in terms of temporal artifacts during an eye motion relative to the display, for
e. For instance, the different focal planes in a scene may, in this manner, be
interleaved, to minimize visible artifacts in response to a head motion (as is discussed in
greater detail later in this disclosure). A line-by-line focus modulator may be operatively coupled
to a line scan display, such as a grating light valve display, in which a linear array of pixels is
swept to form an image; and may be operatively coupled to scanned light displays, such as
fiber-scanned displays and mirror-scanned light displays.
A stacked uration, similar to those of Figure 8A, may use dynamic DOEs
(rather than the static waveguides and lenses of the embodiment of Figure 8A) to provide multi-
planar focusing simultaneously. For example, with three simultaneous focal planes, a primary
focus plane (based upon ed eye accommodation, for e) could be presented to
the user, and a + margin and — margin (i.e., one focal plane closer, one farther out) could be
utilized to provide a large focal range in which the user can accommodate before the planes
need be updated. This increased focal range can provide a temporal advantage if the user
switches to a closer orfarther focus (i.e., as determined by accommodation ement);
then the new plane of focus could be made to be the middle depth of focus, with the + and —
s again ready for a fast switchover to either one while the system catches up.
Referring to Figure 80, a stack (222) of planar waveguides (244, 246, 248, 250,
252) is shown, each having a reflector (254, 256, 258, 260, 262) at the end and being
configured such that collimated image information injected in one end by a display (224, 226,
228, 230, 232) bounces by total internal tion down to the reflector, at which point some or
all of the light is ted out toward an eye or other target. Each of the reflectors may have
slightly different angles so that they all reflect exiting light toward a common destination such as
a pupil. Such a configuration is somewhat similar to that of Figure 5B, with the ion that
each different angled tor in the embodiment of Figure 80 has its own waveguide for less
interference when ted light is travelling to the targeted reflector. Lenses (234, 236, 238,
240, 242) may be interposed between the displays and waveguides for beam steering and/or
focusing.
Figure 8P illustrates a geometrically staggered version wherein reflectors (276, 278,
280, 282, 284) are positioned at staggered lengths in the waveguides (266, 268, 270, 272, 274)
so that exiting beams may be relatively easily aligned with objects such as an anatomical pupil.
With knowledge of how far the stack (264) is going to be from the eye (such as 28mm between
the cornea of the eye and an eyeglasses lens, a typical comfortable geometry), the geometries
of the reflectors (276, 278, 280, 282, 284) and ides (266, 268, 270, 272, 274) may be
set up to fill the eye pupil (typically about 8mm across or less) with g light. By directing
light to an eye box larger than the diameter of the eye pupil, the viewer may make eye
movements while retaining the ability to see the displayed imagery. Referring back to the
sion related to Figure 5A and 5B about field of view expansion and reflector size, an
expanded field of view is presented by the configuration of Figure 8P as well, and it does not
involve the complexity of the switchable reflective elements of the embodiment of Figure 5B.
] Figure 8Q illustrates a version wherein many reflectors (298) form a vely
continuous curved reflection surface in the aggregate or discrete flat facets that are oriented to
align with an overall curve. The curve could a parabolic or elliptical curve and is shown cutting
across a plurality of waveguides (288, 290, 292, 294, 296) to minimize any crosstalk issues,
although it also could be utilized with a monolithic ide configuration.
In one implementation, a high-frame-rate and lower persistence display may be
ed with a lower-frame-rate and higher persistence display and a variable focus element
to comprise a relatively high-frequency frame sequential volumetric display. In one
ment, the high-frame-rate display has a lower bit depth and the lower-frame-rate display
has a higher bit depth, and are combined to comprise an effective high-frame-rate and high bit
depth display, that is well suited to presenting image slices in a frame sequential fashion. With
such an approach, a three-dimensional volume that is desirably represented is functionally
divided into a series of mensional slices. Each of those mensional slices is
projected to the eye frame sequentially, and in sync with this presentation, the focus of a
variable focus element is changed.
In one ment, to get enough frame rate to support such a configuration, two
display ts may be integrated: a full-color, high-resolution liquid crystal display (“LCD”; a
backlighted ferroelectric panel display also may be utilized in another embodiment; in a further
ment a scanning fiber display may be utilized) operating at 60 frames per second, and
aspects of a -frequency DLP system. Instead of illuminating the back of the LCD panel in
a conventional manner (i.e., with a full size scent lamp or LED array), the conventional
lighting uration may be removed to accommodate using the DLP projector to project a
mask n on the back of the LCD (in one embodiment, the mask pattern may be binary in
that the DLP either projects illumination, or not-illumination; in another embodiment described
below, the DLP may be utilized to project a ale mask image).
DLP projection systems can operate at very high frame rates; in one ment
for 6 depth planes at 60 frames per second, a DLP projection system is operated against the
back of the LCD display at 360 frames/second. Then the DLP projector is utilized to selectively
illuminate portions of the LCD panel in sync with a high-frequency variable focus element (such
as a deformable membrane ) that is ed between the viewing side of the LCD panel
and the eye of the user, the le focus element being used to change the global display
focus on a frame by frame basis at 360 frames/second. In one embodiment, the variable focus
element is positioned to be optically conjugate to the exit pupil, to enable adjustments of focus
without simultaneously affecting image magnification or “zoom.” In another embodiment, the
variable focus element is not conjugate to the exit pupil, such that image magnification changes
accompany focus adjustments, and software is used to compensate for these optical
magnification changes and any distortions by pre-scaling or warping the images to be
presented.
Operationally, it’s useful to consider an example again wherein a three-dimensional
scene is to be presented to a user wherein the sky in the background is to be at a viewing
distance of optical infinity, and wherein a branch coupled to a tree located at a certain location
closer to the user than optical infinity extends from the tree trunk in a direction toward the user,
so that the tip of the branch is closer to the user than is the al portion of the branch that
joins the tree trunk.
] In one embodiment, for a given global frame, the system may be configured to
present on an LCD a full-color, all in-focus image of the tree branch in front the sky. Then at
subframe1, within the global frame, the DLP tor in a binary g configuration (i.e.,
illumination or absence of illumination) may be used to only illuminate the portion of the LCD
that represents the cloudy sky while functionally black-masking (i.e., failing to nate) the
portion of the LCD that ents the tree branch and other elements that are not to be
perceived at the same focal distance as the sky, and the variable focus element (such as a
deformable membrane mirror) may be utilized to position the focal plane at optical infinity so
that the eye sees a sub-image at subframe1 as being clouds that are infinitely far away.
Then at subframe2, the variable focus element may be switched to focusing on a
point about 1 meter away from the user’s eyes (or er distance is required; here 1 meter
for the branch location is used for illustrative purposes), the pattern of illumination from the DLP
can be switched so that the system only illuminates the n of the LCD that represents the
tree branch while functionally black-masking (i.e., failing to illuminate) the portion of the LCD
that represents the sky and other elements that are not to be perceived at the same focal
distance as the tree branch. Thus the eye gets a quick flash of cloud at l infinity followed
by a quick flash of tree at 1 meter, and the sequence is integrated by the eye/brain to form a
three-dimensional perception. The branch may be positioned diagonally relative to the ,
such that it extends through a range of viewing ces, e.g., it may join with the trunk at
around 2 meters g distance while the tips of the branch are at the closer position of 1
meter.
In this case, the display system can divide the 3-D volume of the tree branch into
multiple slices, rather than a single slice at 1 meter. For instance, one focus slice may be used
to represent the sky (using the DLP to mask all areas of the tree during presentation of this
slice), while the tree branch is divided across 5 focus slices (using the DLP to mask the sky and
all portions of the tree except one, for each part of the tree branch to be presented). Preferably,
the depth slices are positioned with a spacing equal to or smaller than the depth of focus of the
eye, such that the viewer will be unlikely to notice the transition between slices, and instead
perceive a smooth and continuous flow of the branch through the focus range.
In another embodiment, rather than utilizing the DLP in a binary (illumination or
darkfield only) mode, it may be utilized to project a grayscale (for e, 256 shades of
grayscale) mask onto the back of the LCD panel to enhance three-dimensional perception. The
grayscale shades may be utilized to impart to the eye/brain a perception that something resides
in n adjacent depth orfocal planes. Back to the branch and clouds scenario, if the
leading edge of the branch closest to the user is to be in focalplane1, then at subframe1, that
portion branch on the LCD may be lit up with full intensity white from the DLP system with the
variable focus element at focalplane1.
] Then at subframe2, with the variable focus element at focalplane2 right behind the
part that was lit up, there would be no illumination. These are similar steps to the binary DLP
masking uration above. r, if there is a n of the branch that is to be
perceived at a position between focalplane1 and focalplane1, e.g., halfway, grayscale masking
can be utilized. The DLP can project an illumination mask to that portion during both
subframe1 and subframe2, but at half-illumination (such as at level 128 out of 256 grayscale)
for each subframe. This provides the perception of a blending of depth of focus layers, with the
perceived focal distance being proportional to the illuminance ratio between subframe1 and
subframe2. For instance, for a portion of the tree branch that should lie 3/4ths of the way
between focalplane1 and focalplane2, an about 25% ity grayscale mask can be used to
illuminate that portion of the LCD at subframe1 and an about 75% grayscale mask can be used
to illuminate the same portion of the LCD at subframe2.
] In one embodiment, the bit depths of both the low-frame-rate display and the high-
rate display can be combined for image modulation, to create a high dynamic range
display. The high dynamic range driving may be conducted in tandem with the focus plane
addressing function described above, to comprise a high dynamic range multi-focal 3-D display.
In another embodiment that may be more efficient on computation resources, only a
certain n of the y (i.e., LCD) output may be mask-illuminated by the DMD and
variably d en route to the user’s eye. For example, the middle portion of the display may
be mask illuminated, with the periphery of the display not providing varying accommodation
cues to the user (i.e. the periphery could be uniformly illuminated by the DLP DMD, while a
central portion is actively masked and variably focused en route to the eye).
In the above described embodiment, a refresh rate of about 360 Hz allows for 6
depth planes at about 60 frames/second each. In another ment, even higher refresh
rates may be achieved by increasing the operating frequency of the DLP. A standard DLP
configuration uses a MEMS device and an array of micro-mirrors that toggle between a mode of
reflecting light toward the display or user to a mode of reflecting light away from the display or
user, such as into a light trap—thus they are inherently binary. DLPs lly create grayscale
images using a pulse width modulation schema wherein the mirror is left in the “on” state for a
variable amount of time for a le duty cycle in order to create a brighter pixel, or pixel of
interim brightness. Thus, to create grayscale images at moderate frame rate, they are running
at a much higher binary rate.
In the above described configurations, such setup works well for creating grayscale
masking. However, if the DLP drive scheme is adapted so that it is flashing subimages in a
binary pattern, then the frame rate may be increased significantly — by thousands of frames per
second, which allows for hundreds to nds of depth planes being refreshed at 60
frames/second, which may be utilized to obviate the between-depth-plane grayscale
interpolating as bed above. A typical pulse width modulation scheme for a Texas
ments DLP system has an 8—bit command signal (first bit is the first long pulse of the
mirror; second bit is a pulse that is half as long as the first; third bit is half as long again; and
so on) — so that the configuration can create 2 to the 8th power different illumination levels. In
one embodiment, the backlighting from the DLP may have its intensity varied in sync with the
different pulses of the DMD to equalize the brightness of the subimages that are created, which
is a practical workaround to get ng DMD drive electronics to produce significantly higher
frame rates.
In another embodiment, direct l changes to the DMD drive electronics and
software may be utilized to have the mirrors always have an equal on-time instead of the
le on-time uration that is conventional, which would facilitate higher frame rates. In
another embodiment, the DMD drive electronics may be configured to t low bit depth
images at a frame rate above that of high bit depth images but lower than the binary frame rate,
enabling some grayscale ng between focus planes, while moderately increasing the
number of focus planes.
In another embodiment, when limited to a finite number of depth planes, such as 6 in
the example above, it is ble to functionally move these 6 depth planes around to be
maximally useful in the scene that is being presented to the user. For example, if a user is
standing in a room and a virtual monster is to be placed into his augmented reality view, the
virtual r being about 2 feet deep in the Z axis straight away from the user’s eyes, then it
makes sense to cluster all 6 depth planes around the center of the monster’s current location
(and dynamically move them with him as he moves ve to the user) — so that more rich
accommodation cues may be provided for the user, with all six depth planes in the direct region
of the monster (for example, 3 in front of the center of the monster, 3 in back of the center of
the monster). Such allocation of depth planes is content dependent.
For example, in the scene above the same monster is to be presented in the same
room, but also to be presented to the user is a virtual window frame element, and then a virtual
view to optical infinity out of the virtual window frame, it will be useful to spend at least one
depth plane on l infinity, one on the depth of the wall that is to house the virtual window
frame, and then perhaps the remaining four depth planes on the monster in the room. If the
content causes the virtual window to ear, then the two depth planes may be dynamically
reallocated to the region around the monster, and so on — content-based c allocation of
focal plane resources to provide the most rich experience to the user given the computing and
presentation ces.
] In another embodiment, phase delays in a multicore fiber or an array of single-core
fibers may be utilized to create variable focus light onts. Referring to Figure 9A, a
multicore fiber (300) may comprise the aggregation of multiple individual fibers (302); Figure
QB shows a up view of a multicore assembly, which emits light from each core in the form
of a spherical wavefront (304) from each. If the cores are transmitting coherent light, e.g., from
a shared laser light , these small spherical wavefronts ultimately uctively and
destructively interfere with each other, and if they were emitted from the multicore fiber in
phase, they will develop an approximately planar wavefront (306) in the aggregate, as shown.
However, if phase delays are induced between the cores (using a conventional phase
tor such as one using lithium niobate, for example, to slow the path of some cores
relative to ), then a curved or spherical wavefront may be created in the aggregate, to
represent at the eyes/brain an object coming from a point closer than optical infinity, which
presents another option that may be used in place of the variable focus elements described
above. In other words, such a phased multicore configuration, or phased array, may be utilized
to create multiple optical focus levels from a light source.
In another embodiment related to the use of optical fibers, a known Fourier
transform aspect of multi-mode l fiber or light guiding rods or pipes may be utilized for
control of the wavefronts that are output from such fiber. Optical fibers typically are available in
two categories: single mode and multi-mode. Multi-mode optical fiber typically has larger core
diameters and allows light to propagate along multiple r paths, rather than just the one of
single mode optical fiber. It is known that if an image is injected into one end of a multi-mode
fiber, that angular differences that are encoded into that image will be retained to some degree
as it propagates through the multi-mode fiber, and for some configurations the output from the
fiber will be significantly similar to a Fourier transform of the image that was input.
Thus in one embodiment, the inverse Fourier transform of a wavefront (such as a
diverging spherical wavefront to represent a focal plane nearer to the user than optical infinity)
may be input so that, after passing through the fiber that optically imparts a Fourier transform,
the output is the desired shaped, or focused, wavefront. Such output end may be scanned
about to be used as a scanned fiber display, or may be used as a light source for a scanning
mirror to form an image, for instance. Thus such a uration may be utilized as yet another
focus modulation subsystem. Other kinds of light patterns and wavefronts may be injected into
a multi-mode fiber, such that on the output end, a certain spatial pattern is emitted. This may
be utilized to have the equivalent of a wavelet pattern (in optics, an optical system may be
analyzed in terms of what are called the Zernicke coefficients; images may be similarly
characterized and decomposed into smaller principal components, or a weighted combination
of comparatively simpler image components). Thus if light is scanned into the eye using the
principal components on the input side, a higher resolution image may be recovered at the
output end of the multi-mode fiber.
In another embodiment, the Fourier transform of a hologram may be injected into the
input end of a multi-mode fiber to output a wavefront that may be used for dimensional
focus modulation and/or tion enhancement. Certain single fiber core, multi-core fibers, or
concentric core + cladding configurations also may be utilized in the aforementioned inverse
Fourier transform configurations.
In another embodiment, rather than physically manipulating the wavefronts
approaching the eye of the user at a high frame rate without regard to the user’s particular state
of accommodation or eye gaze, a system may be configured to monitor the user’s
accommodation and rather than presenting a set of le different light wavefronts, t a
single ont at a time that ponds to the odation state of the eye.
Accommodation may be measured directly (such as by infrared autorefractor or eccentric
photorefraction) or indirectly (such as by measuring the convergence level of the two eyes of
the user; as described above, vergence and accommodation are strongly linked neurologically,
so an te of odation can be made based upon vergence geometry). Thus with a
determined accommodation of, say, 1 meter from the user, then the wavefront presentations at
the eye may be configured for a 1 meter focal distance using any of the above variable focus
configurations. If an accommodation change to focus at 2 meters is detected, the wavefront
presentation at the eye may be reconfigured for a 2 meter focal distance, and so on.
Thus in one ment orating accommodation tracking, a variable focus
element may be placed in the optical path between an outputting combiner (e.g., a waveguide
or beamsplitter) and the eye of the user, so that the focus may be d along with (Le,
preferably at the same rate as) accommodation changes of the eye. Software effects may be
utilized to produce le amounts blur (e.g., Gaussian) to objects which should not be in
focus to simulate the dioptric blur expected at the retina if an object were at that viewing
distance and enhance the three-dimensional perception by the eyes/brain.
A simple ment is a single plane whose focus level is slaved to the viewer’s
accommodation level, however the performance demands on the odation tracking
system can be relaxed if even a low number of multiple planes are used. ing to Figure 10,
in another embodiment, a stack (328) of about 3 waveguides (318, 320, 322) may be utilized to
create three focal planes worth of wavefronts simultaneously. In one ment, the weak
lenses (324, 326) may have static focal distances, and a variable focal lens (316) may be
slaved to the accommodation tracking of the eyes such that one of the three waveguides (say
the middle waveguide 320) outputs what is deemed to be the in-focus ont, while the
other two waveguides (322, 318) output a + margin wavefront and a — margin wavefront (Le, a
little farther than detected focal distance, a little closer than detected focal distance) which may
improve the three-dimensional perception and also provide enough ence for the brain/eye
odation control system to sense some blur as ve ck, which enhances the
perception of reality, and allows a range of accommodation before an physical adjustment of
the focus levels is necessary.
] A variable focus compensating lens (314) is also shown to ensure that light coming
in from the real world (144) in an augmented reality configuration is not refocused or magnified
by the assembly of the stack (328) and output lens (316). The variable focus in the lenses
(316, 314) may be achieved, as discussed above, with refractive, diffractive, or reflective
techniques.
In another embodiment, each of the waveguides in a stack may contain their own
capability for changing focus (such as by having an included electronically switchable DOE) so
that the variable focus element need not be centralized as in the stack (328) of the
configuration of Figure 10.
In another embodiment, variable focus elements may be interleaved between the
waveguides of a stack (i.e., rather than fixed focus weak lenses as in the embodiment of Figure
) to obviate the need for a combination of fixed focus weak lenses plus whole-stack-
refocusing variable focus t.
Such stacking configurations may be used in accommodation tracked variations as
described herein, and also in a frame-sequential multi-focal display approach.
In a configuration wherein light enters the pupil with a small exit pupil, such as 1/2
mm diameter or less, one has the equivalent of a e lens configuration wherein the beam
is always interpreted as in-focus by the eyes/brain—e.g., a d light display using a 0.5
mm diameter beam to scan images to the eye. Such a configuration is known as a Maxwellian
view configuration, and in one embodiment, odation tracking input may be utilized to
induce blur using re to image information that is to be perceived as at a focal plane
behind or in front of the focal plane determined from the accommodation tracking. In other
words, if one starts with a display presenting a Maxwellian view, then everything theoretically
can be in focus, and to provide a rich and l three-dimensional perception, simulated
dioptric blur may be induced with software, and may be slaved to the accommodation tracking
status.
In one embodiment a scanning fiber display is well suited to such configuration
because it may be ured to only output small-diameter beams in a lian form. In
another embodiment, an array of small exit pupils may be created to increase the functional eye
box of the system (and also to reduce the impact of a light-blocking particle which may reside in
the vitreous or cornea of the eye), such as by one or more scanning fiber displays, or by a DOE
uration such as that described in nce to Figure 8K, with a pitch in the array of
presented exit pupils that ensure that only one will hit the anatomical pupil of the user at any
given time (for example, if the average anatomical pupil diameter is 4mm, one configuration
may comprise 1/2 mm exit pupils spaced at intervals of approximate 4mm apart). Such exit
pupils may also be switchable in response to eye position, such that only the eye always
receives one, and only one, active small exit pupil at a time; allowing a denser array of exit
pupils. Such user will have a large depth of focus to which software-based blur techniques may
be added to enhance perceived depth perception.
As discussed above, an object at optical infinity creates a substantially planar
wavefront; an object closer, such as 1m away from the eye, creates a curved wavefront (with
about 1m convex radius of curvature). The eye’s optical system needs to have enough optical
power to bend the ng rays of light so that they end up focused on the retina (convex
wavefront gets turned into concave, and then down to a focal point on the retina). These are
basic functions of the eye.
In many of the embodiments bed above, light directed to the eye has been
treated as being part of one continuous wavefront, some subset of which would hit the pupil of
the particular eye. In another approach, light directed to the eye may be effectively discretized
or broken down into a plurality of ts or individual rays, each of which has a diameter less
than about 0.5mm and a unique propagation y as part of a greater aggregated
wavefront that may be functionally created with the an aggregation of the beamlets or rays. For
example, a curved wavefront may be approximated by aggregating a ity of discrete
oring collimated beams, each of which is approaching the eye from an appropriate angle
to represent a point of origin that matches the center of the radius of curvature of the desired
aggregate wavefront.
When the beamlets have a diameter of about 0.5mm or less, it is as though it is
coming through a pinhole lens configuration, which means that each individual beamlet is
always in relative focus on the retina, independent of the accommodation state of the eye—
however the trajectory of each beamlet will be affected by the accommodation state. For
instance, if the beamlets ch the eye in parallel, representing a discretized collimated
aggregate wavefront, then an eye that is correctly odated to infinity will deflect the
beamlets to all converge upon the same shared spot on the retina, and will appear in focus. If
the eye accommodates to, say, 1 m, the beams will be converged to a spot in front of the retina,
cross paths, and fall on multiple neighboring or partially overlapping spots on the retina—
appearing d.
If the beamlets approach the eye in a diverging configuration, with a shared point of
origin 1 meter from the viewer, then an accommodation of 1 m will steer the beams to a single
spot on the , and will appear in focus; if the viewer odates to infinity, the beamlets
will converge to a spot behind the , and produce multiple neighboring or partially
overlapping spots on the retina, producing a blurred image. Stated more generally, the
accommodation of the eye determines the degree of overlap of the spots on the retina, and a
given pixel is “in focus” when all of the spots are directed to the same spot on the retina and
“defocused” when the spots are offset from one another. This notion that all of the 0.5mm
diameter or less beamlets are always in focus, and that they may be aggregated to be
perceived by the eyes/brain as though they are substantially the same as nt wavefronts,
may be utilized in producing configurations for comfortable three-dimensional virtual or
augmented reality tion.
] In other words, a set of multiple narrow beams may be used to emulate what is
going on with a larger diameter variable focus beam, and if the beamlet diameters are kept to a
maximum of about 0.5mm, then they in a relatively static focus level, and to produce the
perception of out-of-focus when desired, the beamlet angular trajectories may be selected to
create an effect much like a larger out-of-focus beam (such a defocussing treatment may not be
the same as a Gaussian blur treatment as for the larger beam, but will create a multimodal
point spread function that may be interpreted in a similar fashion to a Gaussian blur).
In a preferred embodiment, the beamlets are not mechanically deflected to form this
aggregate focus effect, but rather the eye receives a superset of many ts that includes
both a multiplicity of incident angles and a multiplicity of locations at which the beamlets
intersect the pupil; to represent a given pixel from a particular viewing distance, a subset of
beamlets from the superset that comprise the appropriate angles of incidence and points of
intersection with the pupil (as if they were being emitted from the same shared point of origin in
space) are turned on with matching color and intensity, to represent that aggregate wavefront,
while beamlets in the superset that are inconsistent with the shared point of origin are not
turned on with that color and intensity (but some of them may be turned on with some other
color and intensity level to represent, e.g., a different pixel).
ing to Figure 11A, each of a multiplicity of incoming ts (332) is passing
through a small exit pupil (330) relative to the eye (58) in a tized wavefront display
configuration. Referring to Figure 118, a subset (334) of the group of ts (332) may be
driven with matching color and intensity levels to be perceived as though they are part of the
same larger-sized ray (the bolded subgroup 334 may be deemed an “aggregated beam”). In
this case, the subset of beamlets are parallel to one r, representing a collimated
aggregate beam from optical infinity (such as light coming from a t mountain). The eye is
accommodated to infinity, so the subset of beamlets are deflected by the eye’s cornea and lens
to all fall substantially upon the same location of the retina and are perceived to comprise a
single in focus pixel.
Figure 11C shows r subset of beamlets representing an aggregated
collimated beam (336) coming in from the right side of the field of view of the user’s eye (58) if
the eye (58) is viewed in a l-style planar view from above. Again, the eye is shown
accommodated to infinity, so the beamlets fall on the same spot of the retina, and the pixel is
perceived to be in focus. If, in contrast, a ent subset of beamlets were chosen that were
reaching the eye as a diverging fan of rays, those beamlets would not fall on the same location
of the retina (and be ved as in focus) until the eye were to shift accommodation to a near
point that matches the geometrical point of origin of that fan of rays.
As regards patterns of points of intersection of beamlets with the anatomical pupil of
the eye (i.e., the pattern of exit pupils), they may be organized in configurations such as a
cross-sectionally efficient hex-lattice (for example, as shown in Figure 12A) or a square lattice
or other two-dimensional array. r, a three-dimensional array of exit pupils could be
created, as well as time-varying arrays of exit pupils.
Discretized aggregate onts may be d using several configurations, such
as an array of microdisplays or microprojectors placed optically conjugate with the exit pupil of
viewing optics, microdisplay or microprojector arrays coupled to a direct field of view substrate
(such as an eyeglasses lens) such that they project light to the eye directly, without additional
intermediate viewing optics, successive spatial light modulation array techniques, or waveguide
techniques such as those described in relation to Figure 8K.
Referring to Figure 12A, in one embodiment, a lightfield may be d by bundling
a group of small tors or display units (such as scanned fiber displays). Figure 12A
depicts a hexagonal lattice projection bundle (338) which may, for example, create a 7mm-
diameter hex array with each fiber display outputting a sub-image (340). If such an array has
an optical system, such as a lens, placed in front of it such that the array is placed optically
conjugate with the eye’s entrance pupil, this will create an image of the array at the eye’s pupil,
as shown in Figure 12B, which essentially provides the same optical arrangement as the
ment of Figure 11A.
Each of the small exit pupils of the configuration is created by a dedicated small
display in the bundle (338), such as a scanning fiber display. Optically, it’s as though the entire
hex array (338) is positioned right into the anatomical pupil (45). Such embodiments are
means for driving different subimages to different small exit pupils within the larger anatomical
entrance pupil (45) of the eye, comprising a superset of beamlets with a multiplicity of incident
angles and points of intersection with the eye pupil. Each of the te projectors or ys
may be driven with a ly ent image, such that subimages may be created that pull out
different sets of rays to be driven at different light ities and colors.
In one variation, a strict image conjugate may be created, as in the embodiment of
Figure 12B, wherein there is direct 1-to-1 mapping of the array (338) with the pupil (45). In
another variation, the spacing may be d between displays in the array and the optical
system (lens 342, in Figure 12B) so that d of getting a conjugate mapping of the array to
the eye pupil, the eye pupil may be catching the rays from the array at some other distance.
With such a configuration, one would still get an angular diversity of beams through which one
could create a discretized aggregate wavefront representation, but the mathematics regarding
how to drive which ray and at which power and intensity may become more complex (although,
on the other hand, such a configuration may be considered simpler from a viewing optics
perspective). The mathematics involved with light field image capture may be leveraged for
these calculations.
Referring to Figure 13A, another lightfield creating embodiment is depicted wherein
an array of microdisplays or rojectors (346) may be coupled to a frame (344; such as an
eyeglasses frame) to be positioned in front of the eye (58). The depicted configuration is a
nonconjugate arrangement n there are no large-scale optical elements interposed
between the displays (for example, scanning fiber displays) of the array (346) and the eye (58).
One can imagine a pair of glasses, and coupled to those glasses are a plurality of displays,
such as scanning fiber engines, positioned orthogonal to the eyeglasses surface, and all angled
inward so they are pointing at the pupil of the user. Each display may be configured to create a
set of rays representing different elements of the beamlet superset.
With such a configuration, at the anatomical pupil (45) the user is going to receive a
similar result as received in the embodiments discussed in reference to Figure 11A, in which
every point at the user’s pupil is receiving rays with a multiplicity of angles of incidence and
points of intersection that are being buted from the different displays. Figure 13B
illustrates a nonconjugate uration similar to that of Figure 13A, with the exception that the
embodiment of Figure 13B features a reflecting surface (348) to facilitate moving the display
array (346) away from the eye’s (58) field of view, while also allowing views of the real world
(144) through the reflective e (348).
] Thus another configuration for creating the r diversity necessary for a
discretized aggregate wavefront display is presented. To optimize such a configuration, the
sizes of the displays may be sed to the maximum. Scanning fiber displays which may
be utilized as displays may have baseline diameters in the range of 1mm, but reduction in
enclosure and projection lens re may decrease the diameters of such displays to about
0.5mm or less, which is less disturbing for a user. Another downsizing geometric ment
may be ed by directly coupling a collimating lens (which may, for example, comprise a
gradient refractive index, or “GRIN”, lens, a tional curved lens, or a diffractive lens) to
the tip of the scanning fiber itself in a case of a fiber scanning display array. For example,
referring to Figure 13D, a GRIN lens (354) is shown fused to the end of a single mode optical
fiber. An actuator (350; such as a piezoelectric actuator) is coupled to the fiber (352) and may
be used to scan the fiber tip.
In another embodiment the end of the fiber may be shaped into a hemispherical
shape using a curved polishing treatment of an l fiber to create a lensing effect. In
another embodiment a standard refractive lens may be coupled to the end of each optical fiber
using an adhesive. In r embodiment a lens may be built from a dab of transmissive
polymeric material or glass, such as epoxy. In another embodiment the end of an optical fiber
may be melted to create a curved surface for a lensing effect.
Figure 13C-2 shows an embodiment wherein display configurations (i.e., scanning
fiber displays with GRIN lenses; shown in up view of Figure 13C-1) such as that shown
in Figure 13D may be d er through a single transparent substrate (356) preferably
having a refractive index that closely matches the cladding of the optical fibers (352) so that the
fibers themselves are not very visible for viewing of the outside world across the depicted
assembly (if the index matching of the cladding is done ely, then the larger
cladding/housing becomes transparent and only the tiny cores, which preferably are about 3
microns in diameter, will be obstructing the view. In one embodiment the matrix (358) of
displays may all be angled inward so they are directed toward the anatomic pupil of the user (in
another embodiment, they may stay parallel to each other, but such a configuration is less
efficient).
Referring to Figure 13E, another embodiment is ed wherein rather than using
circular fibers to move ally, a thin series of planar waveguides (358) are configured to be
cantilevered relative to a larger substrate structure (356). In one variation, the substrate (356)
may be moved to produce cyclic motion (i.e., at the resonant frequency of the cantilevered
members 358) of the planar ides ve to the substrate structure. In another
variation, the cantilevered waveguide portions (358) may be actuated with piezoelectric or other
actuators relative to the substrate. lmage illumination information may be injected, for example,
from the right side (360) of the ate structure to be d into the cantilevered
waveguide portions (358). In one embodiment the substrate (356) may comprise a ide
ured (such as with an integrated DOE configuration as described above) to totally
internally reflect incoming light (360) along its length and then redirect it to the evered
waveguide portions (358). As a person gazes toward the cantilevered waveguide portions
(358) and through to the real world (144) behind, the planar waveguides are configured to
minimize any dispersion and/or focus changes with their planar shape factors.
In the context of discussing discretized aggregate wavefront displays, there is value
placed in having some angular diversity created for every point in the exit pupil of the eye. In
other words, it is desirable to have multiple incoming beams to represent each pixel in a
displayed image. Referring to Figures 13F-1 and 13F-2, one way to gain further angular and
spatial diversity is to use a multicore fiber and place a lens at the exit point, such as a GRIN
lens, so that the exit beams are deflected through a single nodal point (366); that nodal point
may then be scanned back and forth in a scanned fiber type of arrangement (such as by a
lectric actuator 368). If a retinal conjugate is placed at the plane defined at the end of
the GRIN lens, a display may be created that is onally equivalent to the general case
discretized aggregate wavefront configuration bed above.
Referring to Figure 13G, a similar effect may be achieved not by using a lens, but by
scanning the face of a multicore system at the correct conjugate of an optical system (372), the
goal being to create a higher angular and spatial diversity of beams. In other words, rather than
having a bunch of separately scanned fiber displays as in the bundled e of Figure 12A
described above, some of this requisite r and spatial diversity may be created through
the use of multiple cores to create a plane which may be d by a waveguide. Referring to
Figure 13H, a multicore fiber (362) may be scanned (such as by a piezoelectric actuator 368) to
create a set of beamlets with a multiplicity of angles of incidence and points of intersection
which may be relayed to the eye (58) by a waveguide (370). Thus in one embodiment a
collimated lightfield image may be injected into a waveguide, and without any additional
sing elements, that lightfield display may be translated directly to the human eye.
Figures 13l-13L depict certain cially available ore fiber (362)
configurations (from s such as Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd. of Japan), including one
variation (363) with a gular cross section, as well as variations with flat exit faces (372)
and angled exit faces (374).
Referring to Figure 13M, some additional angular diversity may be created by having
a waveguide (376) fed with a linear array of ys (378), such as scanning fiber displays.
Referring to Figures 14A-14F, r group of configurations for creating a fixed
viewpoint lightfield display is described. Referring back to Figure 11A, if a two-dimensional
plane was created that was intersecting all of the tiny beams coming in from the left, each
beamlet would have a certain point of intersection with that plane. If another plane was created
at a different distance to the left, then all of the beamlets would intersect that plane at a different
location. Then going back to Figure 14A, if various positions on each of two or more planes
can be allowed to selectively transmit or block the light radiation directed through it, such a
multi-planar configuration may be utilized to selectively create a lightfield by independently
modulating individual ts.
The basic embodiment of Figure 14A shows two spatial light modulators, such as
liquid crystal y panels (380, 382; in other embodiments they may be MEMS shutter
displays or DLP DMD arrays) which may be independently controlled to block or transmit
different rays on a high-resolution basis. For e, ing to Figure 14A, if the second
panel (382) blocks or attenuates transmission of rays at point “a” (384), all of the depicted rays
will be blocked; but if only the first panel (380) blocks or attenuates ission of rays at
point “b” (386), then only the lower incoming ray (388) will be blocked/attenuated, while the rest
will be transmitted toward the pupil (45). Each of the controllable panels or planes may be
deemed a “spatial light tor” or “fatte”. The intensity of each transmitted beam passed
through a series of SLMs will be a on of the combination of the transparency of the
various pixels in the various SLM . Thus without any sort of lens elements, a set of
beamlets with a multiplicity of angles and points of intersection (or a “lightfield”) may be created
using a plurality of stacked SLMs. Additional numbers of SLMs beyond two provides more
opportunities to control which beams are selectively attenuated.
As noted briefly above, in addition to using stacked liquid crystal ys as SLMs,
planes of DMD devices from DLP systems may be stacked to function as SLMs, and may be
preferred over liquid crystal systems as SLMs due to their ability to more efficiently pass light
(with a mirror element in a first state, reflectivity to the next element on the way to the eye may
be quite efficient; with a mirror t in a second state, the mirror angle may be moved by
an angle such as 12 degrees to direct the light away from the path to the eye). Referring to
Figure 14B, in one DMD embodiment, two DMDs (390, 390) may be utilized in series with a pair
of lenses (394, 396) in a periscope type of configuration to maintain a high amount of
transmission of light from the real world (144) to the eye (58) of the user. The embodiment of
Figure 14C provides six different DMD (402, 404, 406, 408, 410, 412) plane opportunities to
intercede from an SLM functionality as beams are routed to the eye (58), along with two lenses
(398, 400) for beam control.
Figure 14D illustrates a more complicated periscope type arrangement with up to
four DMDs (422, 424, 426, 428) for SLM functionality and four lenses (414, 420, 416, 418); this
configuration is designed to ensure that the image does not become flipped upside down as it
travels through to the eye (58). Figure 14E illustrates in embodiment wherein light may be
ted between two different DMD devices (430, 432) without any intervening lenses (the
lenses in the above designs are useful in such configurations for incorporating image
ation from the real world), in a hall-of-mirrors type of arrangement wherein the y
may be viewed through the “hall of mirrors” and operates in a mode substantially similar to that
illustrated in Figure 14A. Figure 14F illustrates an embodiment wherein a the non-display
ns of two facing DMD chips (434, 436) may be covered with a reflective layer to
propagate light to and from active display regions (438, 440) of the DMD chips. In other
embodiments, in place of DMDs for SLM functionality, arrays of sliding MEMS shutters (such as
those available from vendors such as Pixtronics, a division of Qualcomm, Inc.) may be utilized
to either pass or block light. In another embodiment, arrays of small louvers that move out of
place to t light-transmitting apertures may similarly be aggregated for SLM functionality.
A lightfield of many small beamlets (say, less than about 0.5mm in diameter) may be
injected into and propagated through a waveguide or other l system. For example, a
tional “birdbath” type of optical system may be suitable for transferring the light of a
lightfield input, or a freeform optics design, as described below, or any number of waveguide
configurations. Figures 15A—15C illustrate the use of a wedge type waveguide (442) along with
a plurality of light sources as another configuration useful in creating a lightfield. Referring to
Figure 15A, light may be injected into the wedge-shaped waveguide (442) from two different
locations/displays (444, 446), and will emerge according to the total internal reflection
properties of the wedge-shaped waveguide at ent angles (448) based upon the points of
injection into the waveguide.
Referring to Figure 15B, if one creates a linear array (450) of displays (such as
scanning fiber displays) ting into the end of the ide as shown, then a large
angular diversity of beams (452) will be exiting the waveguide in one dimension, as shown in
Figure 15C. , if one contemplates adding yet another linear array of displays injecting
into the end of the waveguide but at a slightly different angle, then an r diversity of
beams may be created that exits similarly to the fanned out exit n shown in Figure 15C,
but at an orthogonal axis; together these may be utilized to create a two-dimensional fan of
rays exiting each location of the waveguide. Thus another configuration is presented for
creating angular diversity to form a lightfield display using one or more scanning fiber display
arrays (or alternatively using other displays which will meet the space requirements, such as
miniaturized DLP projection configurations).
Alternatively, as an input to the wedge-shaped waveguides shown herein, a stack of
SLM devices may be utilized, in which case rather than the direct view of SLM output as
described above, the lightfield output from the SLM configuration may be used as an input to a
configuration such as that shown in Figure 15C. One of the key concepts here is that while a
conventional waveguide is best suited to relay beams of collimated light successfully, with a
lightfield of small-diameter collimated beams, conventional waveguide technology may be
utilized to further manipulate the output of such a lightfield system as ed into the side of a
ide, such as a wedge-shaped waveguide, due to the beam size / ation.
In another related embodiment, rather than projecting with le separate
displays, a multicore fiber may be used to generate a lightfield and inject it into the waveguide.
Further, a time-varying lightfield may be utilized as an input, such that rather than creating a
static distribution of ts coming out of a lightfield, one may have some dynamic elements
that are methodically changing the path of the set of beams. They may be done using
components such as waveguides with embedded DOEs (e.g., such as those described above
in reference to Figures SB-8N, or liquid l , as described in reference to Figure 78),
wherein two optical paths are d (one smaller total internal reflection path wherein a liquid
crystal layer is placed in a first voltage state to have a refractive index mismatch with the other
substrate al that causes total al reflection down just the other substrate material’s
waveguide; one larger total internal reflection optical path wherein the liquid crystal layer is
placed in a second e state to have a matching refractive index with the other substrate
material, so that the light totally internally reflects through the composite waveguide which
includes both the liquid crystal portion and the other ate n). Similarly a wedgeshaped
waveguide may be configured to have a bi-modal total internal reflection paradigm (for
e, in one variation, wedge-shaped elements may be ured such that when a liquid
crystal portion is activated, not only is the spacing changed, but also the angle at which the
beams are reflected).
One ment of a scanning light display may be characterized simply as a
scanning fiber display with a lens at the end of the scanned fiber. Many lens varieties are
le, such as a GRIN lens, which may be used to collimate the light or to focus the light
down to a spot smaller than the fiber’s mode field diameter providing the advantage of
producing a numerical aperture (or “NA”) increase and circumventing the optical invariant,
which is correlated inversely with spot size. Smaller spot size lly facilitates a higher
resolution opportunity from a y perspective, which generally is preferred. In one
embodiment, a GRIN lens may be long enough relative to the fiber that it may comprise the
vibrating element (i.e., rather than the usual distal fiber tip vibration with a scanned fiber
display) — a configuration which may be deemed a “scanned GRIN lens display”.
In another embodiment, a diffractive lens may be utilized at the exit end of a
scanning fiber display (i.e., patterned onto the fiber). In another embodiment, a curved mirror
may be positioned on the end of the fiber that operates in a reflecting configuration. Essentially
any of the configurations known to collimate and focus a beam may be used at the end of a
scanning fiber to produce a suitable scanned light display.
Two significant utilities to having a lens coupled to or comprising the end of a
scanned fiber (i.e., as compared to configurations wherein an uncoupled lens may be utilized to
direct light after it exits a fiber) are a) the light exiting may be collimated to obviate the need to
use other external optics to do so; b) the NA, or the angle of the cone at which light sprays out
the end of the single-mode fiber core, may be increased, y decreasing the associated
spot size for the fiber and increasing the available resolution for the y.
As described above, a lens such as a GRIN lens may be fused to or otherwise
coupled to the end of an optical fiber or formed from a portion of the end of the fiber using
techniques such as polishing. In one embodiment, a typical optical fiber with an NA of about
0.13 or 0.14 may have a spot size (also known as the “mode field diameter” for the optical fiber
given the NA) of about 3 microns. This provides for vely high resolution display
possibilities given the industry standard display resolution paradigms (for example, a l
microdisplay technology such as LCD or organic light ng diode, or “OLED” has a spot size
of about 5 microns). Thus the aforementioned scanning light display may have 3/5 of the
smallest pixel pitch available with a conventional display; further, using a lens at the end of the
fiber, the aforementioned uration may produce a spot size in the range of 1-2 microns.
In another embodiment, rather than using a scanned cylindrical fiber, a cantilevered
portion of a waveguide (such as a waveguide created using abrication ses such as
masking and etching, rather than drawn microfiber techniques) may be placed into scanning
oscillatory motion, and may be fitted with lensing at the exit ends.
] In another embodiment, an increased numerical aperture for a fiber to be scanned
may be d using a diffuser (i.e., one configured to r light and create a larger NA)
covering the exit end of the fiber. In one variation, the diffuser may be created by etching the
end of the fiber to create small bits of terrain that scatter light; in another variation a bead or
sandblasting technique, or direct sanding/scuffing technique may be utilized to create scattering
terrain. In another variation, an engineered diffuser, similar to a diffractive element, may be
created to maintain a clean spot size with desirable NA, which ties into the notion of using a
diffractive lens, as noted above.
Referring to Figure 16A, an array of optical fibers (454) is shown coupled in to a
coupler (456) configured to hold them in parallel together so that their ends may be ground and
polished to have an output edge at a critical angle (458; 42 degrees for most glass, for
example) to the longitudinal axes of the input , such that the light exiting the angled faces
will exit as though it had been passing through a prism, and will bend and become nearly
parallel to the es of the polished faces. The beams exiting the fibers (454) in the bundle
will become superimposed, but will be out of phase longitudinally due to the different path
lengths (referring to Figure 168, for example, the difference in path lengths from angled exit
face to focusing lens for the different cores is visible).
What was an X axis type of separation in the bundle before exit from the angled
faces, will become a Z axis separation, a fact that is helpful in creating a multifocal light source
from such a configuration. In another embodiment, rather than using a bundled/coupled
plurality of single mode fibers, a multicore fiber, such as those available from Mitsubishi Cable
Industries, Ltd. of Japan, may be angle polished.
In one embodiment, if a 45 degree angle is ed into a fiber and then covered
with a reflective element, such as a mirror coating, the exiting light may be reflected from the
polished surface and emerge from the side of the fiber (in one embodiment at a location
wherein a flat-polished exit window has been created in the side of the fiber) such that as the
fiber is scanned in what would normally be an X-Y Cartesian nate system axis, that fiber
would now be functionally performing the equivalent of an X-Z scan, with the distance changing
during the course of the scan. Such a configuration may be beneficially utilized to change the
focus of the display as well.
Multicore fibers may be configured to play a role in display resolution enhancement
(i.e., higher resolution). For example, in one embodiment, if te pixel data is sent down a
tight bundle of 19 cores in a multicore fiber, and that cluster is scanned around in a sparse
spiral pattern with the pitch of the spiral being imately equal to the diameter of the
ore, then sweeping around will effectively create a display resolution that is approximately
19x the resolution of a single core fiber being similarly d around. Indeed, it may be more
practical to have the fibers more sparsely positioned relative to each other, as in the
configuration of Figure 16C, which has 7 clusters (464; 7 is used for illustrative purposes
e it is an efficient tiling/hex pattern; other patterns or numbers may be utilized; for
example, a cluster of 19; the configuration is le up or down) of 3 fibers each housed
within a conduit (462).
With a sparse uration as shown in Figure 16C, scanning of the multicore
scans each of the cores through its own local region, as opposed to a configuration wherein the
cores are all packed tightly together and scanned (wherein cores end up overlapping with
ng; if the cores are too close to each other, the NA of the core is not large enough and
the very closely packed cores end up blurring together somewhat and not creating as
discriminable a spot for y). Thus, for resolution increases, it is preferable to have sparse
tiling rather than highly dense , although both will work.
The notion that y packed scanned cores can create blurring at the display
may be utilized as an advantage in one embodiment wherein a plurality (say a triad or cores to
carry red, green, and blue light) of cores may be intentionally packed together densely so that
each triad forms a triad of overlapped spots featuring red, green, and blue light. With such a
configuration, one is able to have an RGB display without having to combine red, green, and
blue into a single-mode core, which is an advantage, because conventional mechanisms for
combining a plurality (such as three) wavelets of light into a single core are subject to significant
losses in l energy. Referring to Figure 16C, in one embodiment each tight cluster of 3
fiber cores contains one core that relays red light, one core that relays green light, and one core
that relays blue light, with the 3 fiber cores close enough together that their positional
differences are not able by the subsequent relay optics, forming an effectively
superimposed RGB pixel; thus, the sparse tiling of 7 clusters produces resolution enhancement
while the tight packing of 3 cores within the clusters facilitates seamless color blending t
the need to utilize glossy RGB fiber combiners (e.g., those using wavelength division
multiplexing or evanescent ng techniques).
Referring to Figure 16D, in another more simple variation, one may have just one
cluster (464) housed in a conduit (468) for, say, red/green/blue (and in another embodiment,
another core may be added for infrared for uses such as eye tracking). In another embodiment,
additional cores may be placed in the tight r to carrying additional wavelengths of light to
comprise a multi-primary display for increased color gamut. Referring to Figure 16E, in r
ment, a sparse array of single cores (470); in one variation with red, green, and blue
combined down each of them) within a conduit (466) may be utilized; such a uration is
workable albeit somewhat less efficient for resolution increase, but not optimum for
red/green/blue combining.
Multicore fibers also may be utilized for creating lightfield displays. lndeed, rather
than keeping the cores separated enough from each other so that the cores do not scan on
each other’s local area at the display panel, as described above in the context of creating a
scanning light display, with a lightfield display, it is desirable to scan around a densely packed
ity of fibers because each of the beams produced represents a specific part of the
lightfield. The light exiting from the d fiber tips can be relatively narrow if the fibers have
a small NA; lightfield configurations may take advantage of this and have an arrangement in
which at the anatomic pupil, a plurality of slightly different beams are being received from the
array. Thus there are optical configurations with scanning a multicore that are onally
equivalent to an array of single scanning fiber modules, and thus a lightfield may be created by
scanning a multicore rather than scanning a group of single mode fibers.
In one embodiment, a multi-core phased array approach may be used to create a
large exit pupil le wavefront configuration to tate three-dimensional perception. A
single laser configuration with phase modulators is described above. In a ore
embodiment, phase delays may be induced into different channels of a multicore fiber, such
that a single laser’s light is injected into all of the cores of the multicore configuration so that
there is mutual coherence.
In one embodiment, a multi-core fiber may be combined with a lens, such as a GRIN
lens. Such lens may be, for example, a refractive lens, diffractive lens, or a polished edge
functioning as a lens. The lens may be a single optical surface, or may comprise multiple
optical surfaces d up. Indeed, in addition to having a single lens that extends the
diameter of the ore, a smaller lenslet array may be desirable at the exit point of light from
the cores of the multicore, for e. Figure 16F shows an mentwherein a multicore
fiber (470) is emitting multiple beams into a lens (472), such as a GRIN lens. The lens collects
the beams down to a focal point (474) in space in front of the lens. In many conventional
configurations, the beams would exit the multicore fiber as diverging. The GRIN or other lens is
configured to function to direct them down to a single point and collimate them, such that the
collimated result may be scanned around for a lightfield display, for instance.
Referring to Figure 16G, smaller lenses (478) may be placed in front of each of the
cores of a multicore (476) configuration, and these lenses may be utilized to collimate; then a
shared lens (480) may be configured to focus the collimated beams down to a diffraction limited
spot (482) that is aligned for all of the three spots. The net result of such a configuration: by
combining three collimated, narrow beams with narrow NA together as shown, one effectively
combines all three into a much larger angle of emission which translates to a smaller spot size
in, for e, a head d optical display system which may be next in the chain of light
ry to the user.
Referring to Figure 16H, one embodiment features a multicore fiber (476) with a
lenslet (478) array feeding the light to a small prism array (484) that deflects the beams
generated by the individual cores to a common point. Alternatively one may have the small
lenslet array shifted relative to the cores such that the light is being ted and focused down
to a single point. Such a configuration may be utilized to increase the cal aperture.
Referring to Figure 16I, a two-step configuration is shown with a small lenslet (478)
array capturing light from the multicore fiber (476), followed sequentially by a shared lens (486)
to focus the beams to a single point (488). Such a configuration may be utilized to increase the
numerical re. As discussed above, a larger NA corresponds to a smaller pixel size and
higher possible display resolution.
] Referring to Figure 16J, a d fiber array which may be held together with a
coupler (456), such as those described above, may be scanned with a reflecting device (494;
such as a DMD module of a DLP system). With multiple single fibers (454) coupled into the
array, or a multicore d, the superimposed light can be directed through one or more
focusing lenses (490, 492) to create a multifocal beam; with the superimposing and angulation
of the array, the different sources are ent distances from the focusing lens, which s
different focus levels in the beams as they emerge from the lens (492) and are directed toward
the retina (54) of the eye (58) of the user. For example, the farthest optical route/beam may
be set up to be a collimated beam representative of optical infinity focal positions. Closer
routes/beams may be associated with diverging spherical wavefronts of closer focal locations.
The multifocal beam may be passed into a scanning mirror which may be configured
to create a raster scan (or, for example, a Lissajous curve scan pattern or a spiral scan pattern)
of the multifocal beam which may be passed through a series of focusing lenses and then to
the cornea and crystalline lens of the eye. The various beams ng from the lenses are
creating different pixels or voxels of varying focal ces that are superimposed.
In one embodiment, one may write different data to each of the light modulation
channels at the front end, thereby creating an image that is projected to the eye with one or
more focus elements. By changing the focal distance of the crystalline lens (i.e., by
accommodating), the user can bring different ng pixels into and out of focus, as shown in
Figures 16K and 16L wherein the crystalline lens is in different Z axis positions. In another
embodiment, the fiber array may be actuated/moved around by a piezoelectric or. In
another embodiment, a relatively thin ribbon array may be resonated in cantilevered form along
the axis dicular to the arrangement of the array fibers (i.e., in the thin ion of the
ribbon) when a piezoelectric actuator is activated. In one variation, a separate piezoelectric
actuator may be ed to create a vibratory scan in the orthogonal long axis. In another
embodiment, a single mirror axis scan may be employed for a slow scan along the long axis
while the fiber ribbon is vibrated resonantly.
Referring to Figure 16M, an array (496) of scanning fiber displays (498) may be
beneficially bundled/tiled for an effective resolution increase, the notion being that with such as
configuration, each scanning fiber of the bundle is configured to write to a different portion of
the image plane (500), as shown, for example, in Figure 16N, wherein each portion of the
image plane is sed by the emissions from a least one bundle. In other embodiments,
optical configurations may be utilized that allow for slight magnification of the beams as they
exit the optical fiber so that there is some overlap in the hexagonal, or other lattice pattern, that
hits the display plane, so there is a better fill factor while also maintaining an adequately small
spot size in the image plane and understanding that there is a subtle magnification in that
image plane.
] Rather than having individual lenses at the end of each scanned fiber enclosure
housing, in one embodiment a monolithic lenslet array may be utilized, so that the lenses can
be as closely packed as possible, which allows for even smaller spot sizes in the image plane
because one may use a lower amount of ication in the optical system. Thus arrays of
fiber scan displays may be used to increase the resolution of the display, or in other words, they
may be used to increase the field of view of the display, e each engine is being used to
scan a different portion of the field of view.
For a lightfield configuration, the emissions may be more bly overlapped at the
image plane. In one embodiment, a lightfield display may be created using a plurality of small
erfibers scanned around in space. For example, instead of having all of the fibers
address a different part of an image plane as described above, have more overlapping, more
fibers angled inward, etc., or change the focal power of the lenses so that the small spot sizes
are not ate with a tiled image plane configuration. Such a configuration may be used to
create a lightfield y to scan lots of smaller diameter rays around that become intercepted
in the same physical space.
Referring back to Figure 128, it was sed that one way of creating a lightfield
display involves making the output of the elements on the left collimated with narrow beams,
and then making the ting array conjugate with the eye pupil on the right.
Referring to Figure 160, with a common substrate block (502), a single actuator
may be utilized to actuate a plurality of fibers (506) in unison together. A similar configuration is
discussed above in reference to Figures 13-C-1 and 13-C-2. It may be practically difficult to
have all of the fibers retain the same resonant frequency, vibrate in a ble phase
relationship to each other, or have the same dimensions of cantilevering from the substrate
block. To address this challenge, the tips of the fibers may be mechanically coupled with a
lattice or sheet (504), such as a graphene sheet that is very thin, rigid, and light in weight. With
such a coupling, the entire array may vibrate similarly and have the same phase relationship.
In r embodiment a matrix of carbon nanotubes may be utilized to couple the fibers, or a
piece of very thin planar glass (such as the kind used in creating liquid crystal display panels)
may be coupled to the fiber ends. Further, a laser or other precision cutting device may be
utilized to cut all associated fibers to the same cantilevered length.
Referring to Figure 17, in one embodiment it may be desirable to have a contact
lens directly interfaced with the cornea, and configured to facilitate the eye focusing on a
display that is quite close (such as the typical distance between a cornea and an sses
lens). Rather than placing an optical lens as a contact lens, in one ion the lens may
comprise a selective filter. Figure 17 depicts a plot (508) what may be deemed a “notch filter”,
due to its design to block only certain wavelength bands, such as 450nm (peak blue), 530nm
(green), and 650nm, and generally pass or transmit other wavelengths. In one embodiment
several layers of tric coatings may be aggregated to provide the notch filtering
functionality.
Such a filtering configuration may be coupled with a scanning fiber y that is
producing a very narrow band illumination for red, green, and blue, and the contact lens with
the notch filtering will block out all of the light coming from the display (such as a minidisplay,
such as an OLED y, mounted in a position normally occupied by an eyeglasses lens)
except for the transmissive ngths. A narrow pinhole may be created in the middle of the
contact lens filtering layers/film such that the small aperture (i.e., less than about 1.5mm
diameter) does allow passage of the otherwise blocked wavelengths. Thus a pinhole lens
configuration is created that functions in a pinhole manner for red, green, and blue only to
intake images from the minidisplay, while light from the real world, which generally is
broadband nation, will pass through the contact lens relatively unimpeded. Thus a large
depth of focus virtual display configuration may be assembled and operated. In another
embodiment, a ated image exiting from a waveguide would be visible at the retina
because of the pinhole depth-of-focus configuration.
It may be useful to create a display that can vary its depth of focus over time. For
e, in one embodiment, a display may be configured to have different display modes that
may be selected (preferably y toggling between the two at the command of the operator)
by an operator, such as a first mode combining a very large depth of focus with a small exit
pupil diameter (i.e., so that hing is in focus all of the time), and a second mode featuring a
larger exit pupil and a more narrow depth of focus. In operation, if a user is to play a three-
dimensional video game with objects to be perceived at many depths of field, the operator may
select the first mode; alternatively, if a user is to type in a long essay (i.e., for a relatively long
period of time) using a two-dimensional word processing display configuration, it may be more
ble to switch to the second mode to have the convenience of a larger exit pupil, and a
sharper image.
] In another embodiment, it may be desirable to have a multi-depth of focus display
configuration n some subimages are presented with a large depth of focus while other
subimages are presented with small depth of focus. For example, one configuration may have
red wavelength and blue wavelength channels presented with a very small exit pupil so that
they are always in focus. Then, a green channel only may be presented with a large exit pupil
configuration with le depth planes (i.e., because the human odation system tends
to preferentially target green wavelengths for optimizing focus level). Thus, in order to cut costs
ated with having too many elements to represent with full depth planes in red, green, and
blue, the green wavelength may be prioritized and represented with various different wavefront
levels. Red and blue may be relegated to being represented with a more lian approach
(and, as described above in reference to Maxwellian displays, software may be utilized to
induce Gaussian levels of blur). Such a y would aneously present multiple depths
of focus.
As described above, there are ns of the retina which have a higher density of
light sensors. The fovea portion, for example, generally is populated with imately 120
cones per visual degree. Display s have been created in the past that use eye or gaze
tracking as an input, and to save computation resources by only creating really high resolution
rendering for where the person is gazing at the time, while lower resolution rendering is
presented to the rest of the retina; the locations of the high versus low resolution portions may
be dynamically slaved to the tracked gaze location in such a configuration, which may be
termed a “foveated display”.
An improvement on such configurations may comprise a scanning fiber display with
pattern spacing that may be dynamically slaved to tracked eye gaze. For e, with a
typical scanning fiber display operating in a spiral pattern, as shown in Figure 18 (the leftmost
portion 510 of the image in Figure 18 illustrates a spiral motion pattern of a scanned multicore
fiber 514; the rightmost portion 512 of the image in Figure 18 illustrates a spiral motion pattern
of a scanned single fiber 516 for comparison), a constant pattern pitch provides for a m
display resolution.
In a foveated display configuration, a non-uniform scanning pitch may be utilized,
with smaller/tighter pitch (and therefore higher resolution) dynamically slaved to the detected
gaze location. For example, if the user’s gaze was detected as moving toward the edge of the
display screen, the spirals may be clustered more densely in such location, which would create
a toroid-type scanning pattern for the esolution portions, and the rest of the y being
in a lower-resolution mode. In a configuration wherein gaps may be created in the portions of
the display in a lower-resolution mode, blur could be intentionally dynamically created to
smooth out the tions between scans, as well as between transitions from esolution
to lower-resolution scan pitch.
The term lightfield may be used to describe a volumetric 3-D representation of light
traveling from an object to a viewer’s eye. r, an optical see-through display can only
reflect light to the eye, not the absence of light, and ambient light from the real world will add to
any light representing a virtual object. That is, if a virtual object presented to the eye ns a
black or very dark portion, the ambient light from the real world may pass through that dark
portion and obscure that it was intended to be dark.
It is nonetheless desirable to be able to present a dark virtual object over a bright
real background, and for that dark virtual object to appear to occupy a volume at a desired
viewing distance; i.e., it is useful to create a “darkfield” representation of that dark virtual object,
in which the absence of light is perceived to be located at a particular point in space. With
regard to ion elements and the presentation of information to the eye of the user so that
he or she can perceive darkfield s of l objects, even in well lighted actual
environments, certain aspects of the aforementioned spatial light modulator, or “SLM”,
configurations are pertinent. As described above, with a light-sensing system such as the eye,
one way to get selective perception of dark field to selectively ate light from such portions
of the display, because the subject y systems are about manipulation and presentation of
light; in other words, darkfield cannot be specifically projected — it’s the lack of illumination that
may be perceived as eld, and thus, configurations for selective attenuation of illumination
have been developed.
Referring back to the discussion of SLM configurations, one way to selectively
ate for a darkfield perception is to block all of the light coming from one angle, while
allowing light from other angles to be transmitted. This may be accomplished with a plurality of
SLM planes comprising elements such as liquid crystal (which may not be the most optimal due
to its relatively low arency when in the transmitting state), DMD elements of DLP systems
(which have relative high transmission/reflection ratios when in such mode), and MEMS arrays
or shutters that are configured to llably shutter or pass light radiation, as described
above.
With regard to suitable liquid crystal display (“LCD”) configurations, a cholesteric
LCD array may be utilized for a lled occlusion/blocking array. As opposed to the
conventional LCD paradigm wherein a polarization state is changed as a on of voltage,
with a cholesteric LCD configuration, a pigment is being bound to the liquid crystal molecule,
and then the molecule is physically tilted in response to an applied e. Such a
configuration may be designed to achieve greater transparency when in a transmissive mode
than conventional LCD, and a stack of polarizing films is not needed as it is with conventional
LCD.
In another embodiment, a plurality of layers of controllably interrupted patterns may
be utilized to controllably block selected presentation of light using moire effects. For example,
in one configuration, two arrays of attenuation patterns, each of which may comprise, for
example, itched sine waves printed or painted upon a transparent planar material such as
a glass ate, may be presented to the eye of a user at a distance close enough that when
the viewer looks through either of the patterns alone, the view is essentially transparent, but if
the viewer looks through both patterns lined up in sequence, the viewer will see a spatial beat
frequency moire attenuation pattern, even when the two attenuation patterns are placed in
sequence vely close to the eye of the user.
The beat frequency is dependent upon the pitch of the patterns on the two
attenuation planes, so in one embodiment, an attenuation pattern for selectively blocking
certain light transmission for eld perception may be created using two sequential patterns,
each of which otherwise would be transparent to the user, but which together in series create a
spatial beat frequency moire ation pattern selected to attenuate in accordance with the
darkfield perception desired in the augmented reality .
In another ment a controlled occlusion paradigm for darkfield effect may be
created using a multi-view display style er. For e, one configuration may
comprise one pin-holed layer that fully occludes with the exception of small apertures or
pinholes, along with a selective attenuation layer in series, which may comprise an LCD, DLP
system, or other selective attenuation layer configuration, such as those described above. In
one scenario, with the pinhole array placed at a typical eyeglasses lens distance from the
cornea (about 30mm), and with a ive attenuation panel located opposite the pinhole array
from the eye, a perception of a sharp mechanical edge out in space may be created. In
essence, if the configuration will allow certain angles of light to pass, and others to be blocked
or occluded, than a perception of a very sharp pattern, such as a sharp edge projection, may be
d. In another d embodiment, the pinhole array layer may be ed with a second
dynamic attenuation layer to e a somewhat similar configuration, but with more controls
than the static pinhole array layer (the static pinhole layer could be simulated, but need not be).
In another related embodiment, the pinholes may be replaced with cylindrical
lenses. The same pattern of occlusion as in the pinhole array layer configuration may be
achieved, but with cylindrical lenses, the array is not restricted to the very tiny pinhole
geometries. To t the eye from being presented with distortions due to the lenses when
g through to the real world, a second lens array may be added on the side of the aperture
or lens array opposite of the side nearest the eye to compensate and provide the view-through
illumination with lly a zero power telescope configuration.
In another embodiment, rather than physically ng light for occlusion and
creation of darkfield tion, the light may be bent or bounced, or a polarization of the light
may be changed if a liquid crystal layer is utilized. For example, in one variation, each liquid
crystal layer may act as a polarization rotator such that if a patterned polarizing material is
incorporated on one face of a panel, then the polarization of individual rays coming from the
real world may be selectively manipulated so they catch a portion of the patterned polarizer.
There are zers known in the art that have checkerboard patterns wherein half of the
“checker boxes” have vertical zation and the other half have horizontal polarization. In
addition, if a material such as liquid crystal is used in which polarization may be selectively
manipulated, light may be selectively attenuated with this.
As described above, selective reflectors may provide r transmission efficiency
than LCD. In one embodiment, if a lens system is placed such that it takes light coming in from
the real world and focuses a plane from the real world onto an image plane, and if a DMD (i.e.,
DLP technology) is placed at that image plane to reflect light when in an “on” state towards
another set of lenses that pass the light to the eye, and those lenses also have the DMD at their
focal length, the one may create an attenuation pattern that is in focus for the eye. In other
words, DMDs may be used in a selective reflector plane in a zero magnification telescope
configuration, such as is shown in Figure 19A, to controllably occlude and facilitate creating
darkfield perception.
As shown in Figure 19A, a lens (518) is taking light from the real world (144) and
focusing it down to an image plane (520); if a DMD (or other spatial attenuation device) (522) is
placed at the focal length of the lens (i.e., at the image plane 520), the lens (518) is going to
take whatever light is coming from optical infinity and focus that onto the image plane (520).
Then the spatial attenuator (522) may be utilized to ively block out things that are to be
attenuated. Figure 19A shows the attenuator DMDs in the transmissive mode wherein they
pass the beams shown crossing the device. The image is then placed at the focal length of the
second lens (524). Preferably the two lenses (518, 524) have the same focal power so they
end up being a zero-power telescope, or a “relay”, that does not magnify views to the real world
(144). Such a configuration may be used to present unmagnified views of the world while also
allowing selective blocking/attenuation of certain pixels.
In another embodiment, as shown in Figures 198 and 19C, additional DMDs may be
added such that light reflects from each of four DMDs (526, 528, 530, 532) before g to
the eye. Figure 198 shows an embodiment with two lenses preferably with the same focal
power (focal length “F”) placed at a 2F relationship from one another (the focal length of the first
being conjugate to the focal length of the second) to have the zero-power telescope effect;
Figure 19C shows an embodiment t lenses. The angles of orientation of the four
reflective panels (526, 528, 530, 532) in the depicted embodiments of Figures 198 and 19C are
shown to be around 45 degrees for simple illustration purposes, but specific relative orientation
is required (for example, a typical DMD reflect at about a 12 degree angle).
In another embodiment, the panels may also be lectric, or may be any other
kind of tive or selective attenuator panel or array. In one embodiment similar to those
depicted in Figures 198 and 19C, one of the three reflector arrays may be a simple mirror, such
that the other 3 are selective attenuators, thus still ing three independent planes to
controllably occlude portions of the incoming illumination in furtherance of darkfield perception.
By having multiple dynamic reflective attenuators in series, masks at different optical ces
relative to the real world may be created.
Alternatively, referring back to Figure 19C, one may create a configuration wherein
one or more DMDs are placed in a reflective periscope configuration without any lenses. Such
a configuration may be driven in lightfield algorithms to selectively attenuate certain rays while
others are passed.
In another ment, a DMD or similar matrix of controllably movable devices
may be created upon a transparent substrate as opposed to a generally opaque substrate, for
use in a issive configuration such as l reality.
In another ment, two LCD panels may be utilized as lightfield occluders. In
one ion, they may be t of as attenuators due to their ating lity as
described above; alternatively they may be considered polarization rotators with a shared
polarizer stack. Suitable LCDs may comprise components such as blue phase liquid crystal,
cholesteric liquid crystal, ferroelectric liquid crystal, and/or twisted nematic liquid crystal.
One embodiment may comprise an array of directionally-selective occlusion
elements, such as a MEMS device featuring a set of louvers that can change rotation such that
they pass the majority of light that is coming from a particular angle, but are presenting more of
a broad face to light that is coming from a different angle (somewhat akin to the manner in
which plantation shutters may be utilized with a typical human scale window). The
MEMS/louvers uration may be placed upon an optically arent substrate, with the
louvers substantially opaque. Ideally such a configuration would have a louver pitch fine
enough to ably occlude light on a pixel-by-pixel basis. In another embodiment, two or
more layers or stacks of louvers may be combined to provide yet further ls. In r
embodiment, rather than selectively blocking light, the louvers may be polarizers configured to
change the polarization state of light on a controllably variable basis.
As described above, another embodiment for selective occlusion may comprise an
array of sliding panels in a MEMS device such that the sliding panels may be controllably
opened (i.e., by g in a planar fashion from a first on to a second on; or by
rotating from a first orientation to a second orientation; or, for example, combined rotational
reorientation and displacement) to it light through a small frame or aperture, and
controllably closed to occlude the frame or aperture and prevent transmission. The array may
be configured to open or occlude the various frames or apertures such that they maximally
attenuate the rays that are to be ated, and only minimally attenuate the rays to be
transmitted.
In an embodiment n a fixed number of sliding panels can either occupy a first
position occluding a first aperture and opening a second aperture, or a second position
occluding the second aperture and opening the first aperture, there will always be the same
amount of light transmitted overall se 50% of the apertures are occluded, and the other
50% are open, with such a configuration), but the local position changes of the shutters or
doors may create targeted moire or other s for darkfield perception with the dynamic
positioning of the various sliding panels. In one embodiment, the sliding panels may comprise
sliding polarizers, and if placed in a stacked configuration with other polarizing elements that
are either static or dynamic, may be utilized to selectively attenuate.
Referring to Figure 19D, another configuration providing an opportunity for selective
tion, such as via a DMD style reflector array (534), is shown, such that a stacked set of
two waveguides (536, 538) along with a pair of focus elements (540, 542) and a tor (534;
such as a DMD) may be used to capture a portion of incoming light with an entrance reflector
(544). The reflected light may be totally internally reflected down the length of the first
waveguide (536), into a focusing element (540) to bring the light into focus on a reflector (534)
such as a DMD array, after which the DMD may selectively attenuate and reflect a portion of
the light back through a focusing lens (542; the lens configured to facilitate injection of the light
back into the second waveguide) and into the second ide (538) for total internal
reflection down to an exit reflector (546) configured to exit the light out of the waveguide and
toward the eye (58).
Such a configuration may have a relatively thin shape factor, and is designed to
allow light from the real world (144) to be selectively ated. As waveguides work most
cleanly with collimated light, such a configuration may be well suited for virtual reality
configurations wherein focal s are in the range of optical infinity. For closer focal lengths,
a lightfield display may be used as a layer on top of the silhouette created by the
aforementioned selective attenuation / darkfield configuration to provide other cues to the eye
of the user that light is coming from another focal distance. An occlusion mask may be out of
focus, even nondesirably so, and then in one embodiment, a lightfield on top of the masking
layer may be used to hide the fact that the darkfield may be at the wrong focal distance.
Referring to Figure 19E, an embodiment is shown featuring two waveguides (552,
554) each having two angled reflectors (558, 544; 556, 546) for illustrative purposes shown at
approximately 45 degrees; in actual configurations the angle may differ depending upon the
reflective surface, reflective/refractive properties of the waveguides, etc.) directing a n of
light incoming from the real world down each side of a first waveguide (or down two separate
waveguides if the top layer is not monolithic) such that it hits a reflector (548, 550) at each end,
such as a DMD which may be used for ive attenuation, after which the reflected light may
be injected back into the second waveguide (or into two separate waveguides if the bottom
layer is not monolithic) and back toward two angled reflectors (again, they need not be at 45
degrees as shown) for exit out toward the eye (58).
ng lenses may also be placed between the reflectors at each end and the
waveguides. In another embodiment the reflectors (548, 550) at each end may se
standard mirrors (such as ed s). Further, the reflectors may be wavelength
selective reflectors, such as dichroic s or film interference filters. Further, the reflectors
may be diffractive elements ured to reflect incoming light.
Figure 19F rates a configuration wherein four reflective surfaces in a pyramid
type configuration are utilized to direct light through two waveguides (560, 562), in which
incoming light from the real world may be divided up and reflected to four difference axes. The
pyramid-shaped reflector (564) may have more than fourfacets, and may be resident within the
substrate prism, as with the tors of the configuration of Figure 19E. The configuration of
Figure 19F is an extension of that of Figure 19E.
Referring to Figure 19G, a single waveguide (566) may be utilized to capture light
from the world (144) with one or more reflective es (574, 576, 578, 580, 582), relay it
(570) to a selective attenuator (568; such as a DMD array), and recouple it back into the same
waveguide so that it propagates (572) and encounters one or more other reflective surfaces
(584, 586, 588, 590, 592) that cause it to at least partially exit (594) the waveguide on a path
toward the eye (58) of the user. ably the ide comprises selective reflectors such
that one group (574, 576, 578, 580, 582) may be switched on to capture incoming light and
direct it down to the selective attenuator, while separate another group (584, 586, 588, 590,
592) may be switched on to exit light returning from the selective attenuator out toward the eye
(58).
For simplicity the selective attenuator is shown oriented substantially dicularly
to the waveguide; in other embodiments, s optics components, such as refractive or
reflective optics, may be utilized to have the ive attenuator at a different and more
compact orientation relative to the waveguide.
Referring to Figure 19H, a variation on the configuration described in reference to
Figure 19D is illustrated. This configuration is somewhat analogous to that discussed above in
reference to Figure 5B, wherein a switchable array of reflectors may be embedded within each
of a pair of waveguides (602, 604). Referring to Figure 19H, a ller may be configured to
turn the reflectors (598, 600) on and off in sequence, such that multiple reflectors may be
operated on a frame sequential basis; then the DMD or other selective attenuator (594) may
also be sequentially driven in sync with the different mirrors being turned on and off.
ing to Figure 19l, a pair of wedge-shaped waveguides similar to those
described above (for example, in reference to Figures 15A—15C) are shown in side or sectional
view to illustrate that the two long es of each wedge-shaped waveguide (610, 612) are
not co-planar. A ng film” (606, 608; such as that available from 3M corporation under the
trade name, “TRAF”, which in essence comprises a microprism array), may be utilized on one
or more surfaces of the wedge-shaped waveguides to either turn incoming rays at an angle so
that they will be captured by total al reflection, or to turn outgoing rays as they are exiting
the waveguide toward an eye or other target. Incoming rays are ed down the first wedge
and toward the selective attenuator (614) such as a DMD, LCD (such as a ferroelectric LCD), or
an LCD stack to act as a mask).
After the selective ator (614), reflected light is coupled back into the second
wedge-shaped ide which then relays the light by total internal reflection along the
wedge. The properties of the wedge-shaped waveguide are intentionally such that each
bounce of light causes an angle change; the point at which the angle has changed enough to
be the critical angle to escape total internal reflection becomes the exit point from the wedge-
shaped waveguide. Typically the exit will be at an oblique angle, so another layer of turning
film may be used to “turn” the exiting light toward a targeted object such as the eye (58).
Referring to Figure 19J, several arcuate lenslet arrays (616, 620, 622) are
positioned relative to an eye and configured such that a spatial attenuator array (618) is
oned at a focal/image plane so that it may be in focus with the eye (58). The first (616)
and second (620) arrays are configured such that in the aggregate, light g from the real
world to the eye is essentially passed through a zero power telescope. The embodiment of
Figure 19J shows a third array (622) of lenslets which may be utilized for improved optical
compensation, but the general case does not require such a third layer. As discussed above,
having telescopic lenses that are the diameter of the viewing optic may create an undesirably
large form factor (somewhat akin to having a bunch of small sets of binoculars in front of the
eyes).
One way to optimize the overall geometry is to reduce the diameter of the lenses by
splitting them out into smaller lenslets, as shown in Figure 19J (i.e., an array of lenses rather
than one single large lens). The lenslet arrays (616, 620, 622) are shown wrapped radially or
ely around the eye (58) to ensure that beams ng to the pupil are aligned through
the appropriate lenslets (else the system may suffer from optical problems such as dispersion,
ng, and/or lack of . Thus all of the lenslets are oriented “toed in” and pointed at the
pupil of the eye (58), and the system facilitates avoidance of ios wherein rays are
ated h unintended sets of lenses en route to the pupil.
Referring to Figures 19K-19N, various software approaches may be utilized to assist
in the presentation of darkfield in a virtual or augmented reality displace scenario. Referring to
Figure 19K, a typical challenging scenario for augmented reality is depicted (632), with a
ed carpet (624) and non-uniform background ectural features (626), both of which
are lightly-colored. The black box (628) depicted indicates the region of the display in which
one or more augmented reality features are to be presented to the user for three-dimensional
perception, and in the black box a robot creature (630) is being presented that may, for
example, be part of an augmented reality game in which the user is engaged. In the depicted
example, the robot character (630) is darkly-colored, which makes for a challenging
tation in three-dimensional perception, particularly with the background selected for this
example scenario.
] As discussed briefly above, one of the main challenges for a presenting eld
augmented reality object is that the system generally cannot add or paint in “darkness”;
generally the display is configured to add light. Thus, referring to Figure 19L, without any
lized software treatments to enhance darkfield perception, presentation of the robot
character in the augmented reality view results in a scene n portions of the robot
character that are to be essentially flat black in presentation are not visible, and portions of the
robot character that are to have some lighting (such as the lightly-pigmented cover of the
shoulder gun of the robot character) are only barely visible (634) — they appear almost like a
light grayscale disruption to the otherwise normal background image.
Referring to Figure 19M, using a software-based global attenuation treatment (akin
to digitally g on a pair of sunglasses) provides enhanced visibility to the robot character
because the brightness of the nearly black robot ter is effectively increased relative to
the rest of the space, which now appears more dark (640). Also shown in Figure 19M is a
digitally-added light halo (636) which may be added to enhance and distinguish the now-more-
visible robot character shapes (638) from the background. With the halo treatment, even the
portions of the robot character that are to be presented as flat black become visible with the
contrast to the white halo, or “aura” presented around the robot character.
Preferably the halo may be presented to the user with a perceived focal distance
that is behind the focal distance of the robot character in three-dimensional space. In a
configuration wherein single panel occlusion techniques such as those described above is
being utilized to present darkfield, the light halo may be presented with an intensity gradient to
match the dark halo that may accompany the occlusion, minimizing the visibility of either
darkfield effect. Further, the halo may be ted with blurring to the background behind the
ted halo illumination for further guishing effect. A more subtle aura or halo effect
may be d by matching, at least in part, the color and/or brightness of a relatively light-
colored background.
Referring to Figure 19N, some or all of the black intonations of the robot character
may be changed to dark, cool blue colors to provide a r guishing effect relative to the
background, and relatively good visualization of the robot (642).
Wedge-shaped ides have been described above, such as in reference to
Figures 15A—15D and Figure 19l. With a wedge-shaped waveguide, every time a ray bounces
off of one of the non-coplanar surfaces, it gets an angle change, which ultimately results in the
ray exiting total internal reflection when its ch angle to one of the surfaces goes past the
critical angle. Turning films may be used to redirect exiting light so that exiting beams leave
with a trajectory that is more or less perpendicular to the exit surface, depending upon the
geometric and ergonomic issues at play.
With a series or array of displays injecting image information into a wedge-shaped
waveguide, as shown in Figure 15C, for example, the wedge-shaped waveguide may be
configured to create a fine-pitched array of angle-biased rays ng from the wedge.
Somewhat rly, it has been discussed above that a lightfield display, or a variable
wavefront creating waveguide, both may produce a multiplicity of beamlets or beams to
represent a single pixel in space such that wherever the eye is positioned, the eye is hit by a
plurality of different beamlets or beams that are unique to that particular eye position in front of
the display panel.
As was further discussed above in the context of lightfield displays, a ity of
g zones may be created within a given pupil, and each may be used for a different focal
distance, with the aggregate producing a perception similar to that of a le wavefront
creating ide, or similar to the actual optical physics of reality of the s viewed were
real. Thus a wedge-shaped ide with multiple displays may be utilized to generate a
lightfield. In an embodiment similar to that of Figure 15C with a linear array of displays injecting
image information, a fan of exiting rays is created for each pixel. This concept may be
ed in an embodiment wherein multiple linear arrays are d to all inject image
information into the shaped waveguide (in one variation, one array may inject at one
angle relative to the wedge-shaped waveguide face, while the second array may inject at a
second angle relative to the wedge-shaped waveguide face), in which case exit beams fan out
at two different axes from the wedge.
Thus such a configuration may be utilized to produce pluralities of beams spraying
out at lots of different angles, and each beam may be driven separately due to the fact that
under such configuration, each beam is driven using a separate display. In another
embodiment, one or more arrays or displays may be ured to inject image information into
wedge-shaped waveguide through sides or faces of the wedge-shaped waveguide other than
that shown in Figure 15C, such as by using a diffractive optic to bend injected image
information into total an al reflection configuration relative to the wedge-shaped
waveguide.
Various reflectors or reflecting surfaces may also be utilized in concert with such a
shaped waveguide embodiment to outcouple and manage light from the wedge-shaped
waveguide. In one embodiment, an entrance aperture to a wedge-shaped waveguide, or
injection of image information through a different face other than shown in Figure 15C, may be
ed to facilitate staggering (geometric and/or temporal) of different displays and arrays such
that a Z-axis delta may also be developed as a means for injecting three-dimensional
information into the wedge-shaped ide. For a greater than three-dimensions array
configuration, various displays may be configured to enter a wedge-shaped ide at
multiple edges in multiple stacks with staggering to get higher dimensional configurations.
Referring to Figure 20A, a configuration similar to that depicted in Figure 8H is
shown wherein a waveguide (646) has a diffractive optical element (648; or “DOE”, as noted
above) sandwiched in the middle (alternatively, as described above, the ctive optical
element may reside on the front or back face of the depicted waveguide). A ray may enter the
waveguide (646) from the projector or display (644). Once in the waveguide (646), each time
the ray intersects the DOE (648), part of it is exited out of the ide (646). As described
above, the DOE may be designed such that the exit nance across the length of the
waveguide (646) is somewhat uniform (for example, the first such DOE intersection may be
configured to exit about 10% of the light; then the second DOE intersection may be configured
to exit about 10% of the remaining light so that 81% is passed on, and so on; in another
embodied a DOE may be designed to have a variable diffraction efficiency, such as linearly-
decreasing diffraction efficiency, along its length to map out a more m exit illuminance
across the length of the waveguide).
To further distribute remaining light that reaches an end (and in one embodiment to
allow for selection of a relatively low diffraction ency DOE which would be favorable from a
view-to-the-world transparency perspective), a reflective t (650) at one or both ends may
be included. Further, referring to the embodiment of Figure 20B, additional distribution and
preservation may be achieved by including an elongate reflector (652) across the length of the
waveguide as shown (comprising, for example, a thin film dichroic coating that is wavelength-
selective); ably such reflector would be blocking light that accidentally is reflected upward
(back toward the real world 144 for exit in a way that it would not be utilized by the viewer). In
some embodiments, such an te reflector may contribute to a “ghosting” effect perception
by the user.
In one ment, this ghosting effect may be eliminated by having a dual-
waveguide (646, 654) circulating reflection configuration, such as that shown in Figure 20C,
which is designed to keep the light moving around until it has been exited toward the eye (58) in
a preferably substantially equally distributed manner across the length of the waveguide
ly. Referring to Figure 20C, light may be injected with a projector or display (644), and
as it travels across the DOE (656) of the first waveguide (654), it ejects a preferably
substantially uniform pattern of light out toward the eye (58); light that remains in the first
ide is reflected by a first reflector assembly (660) into the second waveguide (646). In
one embodiment, the second ide (646) may be configured to not have a DOE, such that
it merely transports or recycles the ing light back to the first waveguide, using the second
tor assembly.
In another embodiment (as shown in Figure 20C) the second waveguide (646) may
also have a DOE (648) configured to uniformly eject fractions of travelling light to provide a
second plane of focus for three-dimensional perception. Unlike the configurations of s
20A and 208, the configuration of Figure 20C is designed for light to travel the waveguide in
one direction, which avoids the aforementioned ghosting problem that is related to passing light
backwards through a waveguide with a DOE. Referring to Figure 20D, rather than having a
mirror or box style reflector assembly (660) at the ends of a waveguide for ing the light,
an array of smaller retroreflectors (662), or a retroreflective material, may be utilized.
] Referring to Figure 20E, an embodiment is shown that utilizes some of the light
recycling configurations of the embodiment of Figure 20C to “snake” the light down through a
waveguide (646) having a sandwiched DOE (648) after it has been injected with a display or
projector (644) so that it crosses the ide (646) many times back and forth before
reaching the bottom, at which point it may be recycled back up to the top level for further
recycling. Such a configuration not only recycles the light and facilitates use of relatively low
diffraction efficiency DOE elements for exiting light toward the eye (58), but also distributes the
light, to provide for a large exit pupil configuration akin to that described in reference to Figure
Referring to Figure 20F, an illustrative configuration similar to that of Figure 5A is
shown, with incoming light injected along a conventional prism or beamsplitter substrate (104)
to a reflector (102) without total internal reflection (i.e., without the prism being considered a
waveguide) because the input projection (106), scanning or otherwise, is kept within the bounds
of the prism — which means that the geometry of such prism becomes a significant constraint.
In r embodiment, a waveguide may be utilized in place of the simple prism of Figure 20F,
which facilitates the use of total internal reflection to provide more geometric flexibility.
] Other configurations describe above are configured to profit from the inclusion of
waveguides for similar manipulations and light. For example, ing back to Figure 7A, the
general concept illustrated therein is that a ated image injected into a waveguide may be
refocused before er out toward an eye, in a configuration also designed to facilitate
viewing light from the real world. In place of the refractive lens shown in Figure 7A, a diffractive
optical element may be used as a variable focus element.
Referring back to Figure 7B, another waveguide configuration is rated in the
context of having multiple layers stacked upon each other with llable access toggling
between a smaller path (total internal reflection through a waveguide) and a larger path (total
internal reflection through a hybrid waveguide comprising the original waveguide and a liquid
l isolated region with the liquid crystal switched to a mode wherein the refractive indices
are substantially matched n the main waveguide and the auxiliary ide), so that
the controller can tune on a frame-by-frame basis which path is being taken. peed
switching electro-active materials, such as lithium niobate, facilitate path changes with such a
configuration at gigahertz rates, which allows one to change the path of light on a pixel-by-pixel
basis.
Referring back to Figure 8A, a stack of waveguides paired with weak lenses is
illustrated to demonstrate a multifocal configuration wherein the lens and ide elements
may be static. Each pair of waveguide and lens may be functionally replaced with waveguide
having an embedded DOE element (which may be static, in a closer analogy to the
configuration of Figure 8A, or c), such as that described in reference to Figure 8|.
Referring to Figure 20G, if a transparent prism or block (104; Le, not a waveguide)
is utilized to hold a mirror or reflector (102) in a periscope type of configuration to receive light
from other components, such as a lens (662) and projector or y (644), the field of view is
limited by the size of that reflector (102; the bigger the reflector, the wider the field of view).
Thus to have a larger field of view with such configuration, a thicker substrate may be needed
to hold a larger reflector; ise, the functionality of an ated plurality of reflectors
may be utilized to increase the functional field of view, as described in reference to Figures 80,
8P, and 8Q. Referring to Figure 20H, a stack (664) of planar waveguides (666), each fed with a
display or projector (644; or in another embodiment a multiplexing of a single y) and
having an exit reflector (668), may be utilized to aggregate toward the on of a larger single
reflector. The exit reflectors may be at the same angle in some cases, or not the same angle in
other cases, depending upon the positioning of the eye (58) relative to the assembly.
Figure 20l illustrates a related configuration, wherein the reflectors (680, 682, 684,
686, 688) in each of the planar waveguides (670, 672, 674, 676, 678) have been offset from
each other, and wherein each takes in light from a tor or display (644) which may be sent
through a lens (690) to ultimately contribute exiting light to the pupil (45) of the eye (58) by
virtue of the reflectors (680, 682, 684, 686, 688) in each of the planar waveguides (670, 672,
674, 676, 678). If one can create a total range of all of the angles that would be expected to be
seen in the scene (i.e., ably without blind spots in the key field of view), then a useful field
of view has been achieved. As bed above, the eye (58) functions based at least on what
angle light rays enter the eye, and this can be simulated. The rays need not pass h the
exact same point in space at the pupil — rather the light rays just need to get through the pupil
and be sensed by the retina. Figure 20K illustrates a variation wherein the shaded n of
the optical assembly may be utilized as a compensating lens to functionally pass light from the
real world (144) through the assembly as though it has been passed through a zero power
telescope.
Referring to Figure 20J, each of the aforementioned rays may also be a relative
wide beam that is being reflected through the pertinent waveguide (670, 672) by total internal
reflection. The reflector (680, 682) facet size will determine what the g beam width can
Referring to Figure 20L, a further discretization of the reflector is shown, wherein a
plurality of small ht angular reflectors may form a roughly parabolic reflecting surface
(694) in the aggregate through a waveguide or stack thereof (696). Light coming in from the
displays (644; or single MUXed y, for example), such as through a lens (690), is all
directed toward the same shared focal point at the pupil (45) of the eye (58).
Referring back to Figure 13M, a linear array of displays (378) injects light into a
shared waveguide (376). In another embodiment a single display may be multiplexed to a
series of entry lenses to provide similar functionality as the embodiment of Figure 13M, with the
entry lenses creating parallel paths of rays running through the waveguide.
In a conventional waveguide approach wherein total internal reflection is relied upon
for light propagation, the field of view is restricted because there is only a certain angular range
of rays propagating through the waveguide (others may escape out). In one embodiment, if a
red/green/blue (or “RGB”) laserline reflector is placed at one or both ends of the planar
surfaces, akin to a thin film interference filter that is highly reflective for only certain
wavelengths and poorly reflective for other ngths, than one can functionally increase the
range of angles of light propagation. Windows (without the g) may be provided for
allowing light to exit in predetermined locations. Further, the coating may be selected to have a
directional selectivity (somewhat like reflective elements that are only highly reflective for
certain angles of incidence). Such a coating may be most nt for the larger /sides
of a waveguide.
Referring back to Figure 13E, a variation on a scanning fiber display was discussed,
which may be deemed a scanning thin waveguide configuration, such that a ity of very
thin planar waveguides (358) may be oscillated or vibrated such that if a variety of injected
beams is coming through with total internal reflection, the configuration functionally would
e a linear array of beams ng out of the edges of the vibrating ts (358). The
depicted configuration has approximately five externally-projecting planar waveguide portions
(358) in a host medium or ate (356) that is transparent, but which preferably has a
ent refractive index so that the light will stay in total internal reflection within each of the
substrate-bound smaller waveguides that ultimately feed (in the depicted embodiment there is a
90 degree turn in each path at which point a planar, curved, or other reflector may be utilized to
bounce the light outward) the ally-projecting planar waveguide portions (358).
The externally-projecting planar waveguide ns (358) may be vibrated
individually, or as a group along with oscillatory motion of the substrate (356). Such ng
motion may provide horizontal scanning, and for vertical scanning, the input (360) aspect of the
assembly (i.e., such as one or more scanning fiber displays scanning in the vertical axis) may
be utilized. Thus a variation of the scanning fiber display is presented.
Referring back to Figure 13H, a waveguide (370) may be utilized to create a
lightfield. With waveguides working best with collimated beams that may be associated with
optical infinity from a perception perspective, all beams staying in focus may cause perception
discomfort (i.e., the eye will not make a discernible ence in dioptric blur as a function of
accommodation; in other words, the narrow diameter, such as 0.5mm or less, collimated
beamlets may open loop the eye’s accommodation/vergence system, causing discomfort).
] In one embodiment, a single beam may be fed in with a number of cone beamlets
coming out, but if the introduction vector of the entering beam is changed (i.e., laterally shift the
beam injection location for the tor/display relative to the waveguide), one may l
where the beam exits from the waveguide as it is directed toward the eye. Thus one may use a
waveguide to create a lightfield by creating a bunch of narrow diameter collimated beams, and
such a configuration is not reliant upon a true variation in a light wavefront to be associated with
the desired perception at the eye.
If a set of angularly and laterally diverse ts is injected into a waveguide (for
example, by using a multicore fiber and g each core separately; another configuration may
utilize a plurality of fiber scanners coming from different angles; another configuration may
utilize a high-resolution panel display with a lenslet array on top of it), a number of exiting
beamlets can be created at different exit angles and exit locations. Since the waveguide may
scramble the lightfield, the decoding is preferably predetermined.
Referring to Figures 20M and 20N, a ide (646) ly (696) is shown that
comprises d waveguide ents in the vertical or horizontal axis. Rather than
having one monolithic planar waveguide, the notion with these embodiments is to stack a
plurality of smaller waveguides (646) immediately adjacent each other such that light introduced
into one waveguide, in addition to propagating down (i.e., propagating along a Z axis with total
internal reflection in +X,-X) such ide by total al reflection, also totally internally
reflects in the perpendicular axis (+y, -Y) as well, such that it is not spilling into other areas. In
other words, if total internal reflection is from left to right and back during Z axis propagation,
the configuration will be set up to totally internally reflect any light that hits the top or bottom
sides as well; each layer may be driven separately t interference from other layers.
Each waveguide may have a DOE (648) embedded and configured to eject out light with a
predetermined distribution along the length of the waveguide, as described above, with a
predetermined focal length uration (shown in Figure 20M as ranging from 0.5 meters to
optical ty).
In another variation, a very dense stack of waveguides with embedded DOEs may
be produced such that it spans the size of the anatomical pupil of the eye (i.e., such that
multiple layers 698 of the composite waveguide are required to cross the exit pupil, as
illustrated in Figure 20N). With such a configuration, one may feed a ated image for one
wavelength, and then the portion located the next millimeter down producing a diverging
wavefront that represents an object coming from a focal distance of, say, 15 meters away, and
so on, with the notion being that an exit pupil is coming from a number of different waveguides
as a result of the DOEs and total internal reflection through the waveguides and across the
DOEs. Thus rather than creating one uniform exit pupil, such a configuration creates a plurality
of stripes that, in the aggregate, facilitate the perception of ent focal depths with the
eye/brain.
Such a concept may be extended to configurations comprising a waveguide with a
switchable/controllable embedded DOE (i.e. that is switchable to different focal distances), such
as those described in relation to Figures 8B-8N, which allows more efficient light trapping in the
axis across each waveguide. le displays may be coupled into each of the layers, and
each waveguide with DOE would emit rays along its own length. In another embodiment,
rather than relying on total internal reflection, a ine reflector may be used to increase
angular range. In between layers of the ite waveguide, a completely reflective
metallized coating may be utilized, such as aluminum, to ensure total reflection, or alternatively
dichroic style or narrow band reflectors may be utilized.
ing to Figure 200, the whole composite waveguide assembly (696) maybe be
curved concavely toward the eye (58) such that each of the individual ides is directed
toward the pupil. In other words, the configuration may be designed to more efficiently direct
the light toward the location where the pupil is likely to be present. Such a configuration also
may be utilized to se the field of view.
As was sed above in relation to Figures 8L, 8M, and 8N, a changeable
diffraction configuration allows for scanning in one axis, somewhat akin to a scanning light
display. Figure 21A illustrates a waveguide (698) having an embedded (i.e., sandwiched
within) DOE (700) with a linear grating term that may be changed to alter the exit angle of
exiting light (702) from the waveguide, as shown. A high-frequency switching DOE material
such as lithium niobate may be ed. In one embodiment, such a scanning configuration
may be used as the sole mechanism for ng a beam in one axis; in another embodiment,
the scanning configuration may be combined with other scanning axes, and may be used to
create a larger field of view (i.e., if a normal field of view is 40 s, and by changing the
linear ction pitch one can steer over another 40 degrees, the effective usable field of view
for the system is 80 degrees).
Referring to Figure 21B, in a conventional configuration, a ide (708) may be
placed perpendicular to a panel display (704), such as an LCD or OLED panel, such that
beams may be injected from the waveguide (708), through a lens (706), and into the panel
(704) in a scanning configuration to provide a viewable display for sion or other purposes.
Thus the waveguide may be utilized in such configuration as a scanning image source, in
contrast to the configurations bed in reference to Figure 21A, wherein a single beam of
light may be manipulated by a scanning fiber or other element to sweep through different
angular locations, and in addition, another direction may be scanned using the high-frequency
diffractive optical element.
In another embodiment, a uniaxial scanning fiber display (say scanning the fast line
scan, as the scanning fiber is relatively high ncy) may be used to inject the fast line scan
into the waveguide, and then the relatively slow DOE switching (i.e., in the range of 100 Hz)
may be used to scan lines in the other axis to form an image.
In another embodiment, a DOE with a grating of fixed pitch may be combined with
an adjacent layer of o-active material having a dynamic refractive index (such as liquid
crystal), so that light may be redirected into the grating at different angles. This is an
application of the basic multipath configuration described above in reference to Figure 7B, in
which an electro-active layer comprising an electro-active material such as liquid crystal or
m e may change its refractive index such that it s the angle at which a ray
emerges from the waveguide. A linear diffraction grating may be added to the configuration of
Figure 7B (in one embodiment, sandwiched within the glass or other material comprising the
larger lower waveguide) such that the diffraction grating may remain at a fixed pitch, but the
light is biased before it hits the grating.
Figure 21C shows another embodiment featuring two like waveguide
elements (710, 712), wherein one or more of them may be electro-active so that the d
refractive index may be changed. The elements may be configured such that when the wedges
have matching refractive indices, the light totally internally ts through the pair (which in the
aggregate performs akin to a planar waveguide with both wedges ng) while the wedge
interfaces have no . Then if one of the refractive indices is changed to create a mismatch,
a beam deflection at the wedge interface (714) is caused, and there is total internal reflection
from that surface back into the associated wedge. Then a controllable DOE (716) with a linear
grating may be coupled along one of the long edges of the wedge to allow light to exit out and
reach the eye at a desirable exit angle.
In another embodiment, a DOE such as a Bragg grating, may be configured to
change pitch versus time, such as by a mechanical stretching of the grating (for example, if the
g resides on or comprises an elastic material), a moire beat pattern between two gratings
on two different planes (the gratings may be the same or different pitches), Z-axis motion (i.e.,
closer to the eye, or farther away from the eye) of the grating, which functionally is similar in
effect to stretching of the grating, or electro-active gratings that may be switched on or off, such
as one created using a polymer dispersed liquid crystal approach n liquid l droplets
may be controllably activated to change the refractive index to become an active grating,
versus turning the voltage off and allowing a switch back to a refractive index that matches that
of the host medium.
In another embodiment, a time-varying grating may be utilized for field of view
expansion by creating a tiled display configuration. Further, a time-varying grating may be
utilized to address chromatic tion re to focus all colors/wavelengths at the same
focal point). One ty of diffraction gratings is that they will deflect a beam as a function of
its angle of incidence and wavelength (Le, a DOE will deflect different ngths by different
angles: somewhat akin to the manner in which a simple prism will divide out a beam into its
wavelength components).
One may use time-varying grating control to compensate for chromatic aberration in
addition to field of view expansion. Thus, for example, in a waveguide with ed DOE
type of configuration as described above, the DOE may be ured to drive the red
wavelength to a slightly different place than the green and blue to s unwanted tic
aberration. The DOE may be time-varied by having a stack of elements that switch on and off
(i.e. to get red, green, and blue to be diffracted outbound similarly).
In another embodiment, a time-varying grating may be utilized for exit pupil
expansion. For example, ing to Figure 21D, it is possible that a waveguide (718) with
embedded DOE (720) may be positioned ve to a target pupil such that none of the beams
exiting in a baseline mode actually enter the target pupil (45) — such that the pertinent pixel
would be missed by the user. A time-varying configuration may be utilized to fill in the gaps in
the outbound exit pattern by shifting the exit pattern laterally (shown in dashed/dotted lines) to
effectively scan each of the 5 exiting beams to better ensure that one of them hits the pupil of
the eye. In other words, the functional exit pupil of the y system is expanded.
In another embodiment, a time-varying grating may be utilized with a waveguide for
one, two, or three axis light scanning. In a manner akin to that described in reference to Figure
21A, one may use a term in a grating that is scanning a beam in the vertical axis, as well as a
grating that is scanning in the horizontal axis. Further, if radial elements of a grating are
incorporated, as is discussed above in on to s SB-8N, one may have scanning of the
beam in the Z axis (i.e., toward/away from the eye), all of which may be time sequential
scanning.
Notwithstanding the discussions herein regarding specialized treatments and uses
of DOEs generally in connection with waveguides, many of these uses of DOE are usable
whether or not the DOE is ed in a waveguide. For example, the output of a waveguide
may be separately manipulated using a DOE; or a beam may be manipulated by a DOE before
it is injected into a waveguide; further, one or more DOEs, such as a time-varying DOE, may
be utilized as an input for rm optics configurations, as discussed below.
] As discussed above in reference to Figures SB-8N, an element of a DOE may have
a circularly-symmetric term, which may be summed with a linear term to create a controlled exit
pattern (i.e., as described above, the same DOE that outcouples light may also focus it). In
another embodiment, the circular term of the DOE diffraction grating may be varied such that
the focus of the beams representing those pertinent pixels is modulated. In addition, one
configuration may have a second/separate circular DOE, obviating the need to have a linear
term in the DOE.
Referring to Figure 21E, one may have a waveguide (722) outputting collimated
light with no DOE element embedded, and a second waveguide that has a circularly-symmetric
DOE that can be switched between le configurations — in one embodiment by having a
stack (724) of such DOE elements e 21 F shows another uration wherein a
functional stack 728 of DOE elements may comprise a stack of polymer dispersed liquid crystal
elements 726, as bed above, wherein without a voltage applied, a host medium refraction
index matches that of a dispersed molecules of liquid crystal; in another embodiment,
molecules of lithium niobate may be dispersed for faster response times; with voltage d,
such as through arent indium tin oxide layers on either side of the host medium, the
dispersed molecules change index of tion and functionally form a ction pattern within
the host medium) that can be switched on/off.
In another embodiment, a ar DOE may be layered in front of a waveguide for
focus modulation. Referring to Figure 21G, the waveguide (722) is outputting collimated light,
which will be perceived as associated with a focal depth of optical infinity unless otherwise
modified. The ated light from the waveguide may be input into a diffractive optical
element (730) which may be used for dynamic focus modulation (i.e., one may switch on and
off different circular DOE patterns to impart various different focuses to the exiting light). In a
related embodiment, a static DOE may be used to focus collimated light exiting from a
waveguide to a single depth of focus that may be useful for a ular user application.
In another embodiment, multiple stacked circular DOEs may be used for additive
power and many focus levels — from a vely small number of switchable DOE layers. In
other words, three different DOE layers may be switched on in various combinations relative to
each other; the optical powers of the DOEs that are switched on may be added. In one
embodiment wherein a range of up to 4 diopters is desired, for example, a first DOE may be
configured to provide half of the total diopter range desired (in this example, 2 diopters of
change in focus); a second DOE may be configured to induce a 1 diopter change in focus;
then a third DOE may be ured to induce a 1/2 diopter change in focus. These three
DOEs may be mixed and matched to provide 1/2, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, and 3.5 diopters of change in
focus. Thus a super large number of DOEs would not be required to get a relatively broad
range of control.
In one embodiment, a matrix of switchable DOE elements may be utilized for
scanning, field of view expansion, and/or exit pupil expansion. Generally in the above
discussions of DOEs, it has been assume that a typical DOE is either all on or all off. In one
variation, a DOE (732) may be subdivided into a plurality of functional tions (such as the
one labeled as element 734 in Figure 21H), each of which preferably is uniquely controllable to
be on or off (for example, referring to Figure 21 H, each subsection may be operated by its own
set of indium tin oxide, or other control lead material, voltage application leads 736 back to a
central controller). Given this level of control over a DOE paradigm, additional urations
are facilitated.
Referring to Figure 21l, a waveguide (738) with ed DOE (740) is viewed
from the top down, with the user’s eye positioned in front of the waveguide. A given pixel may
be represented as a beam coming into the waveguide and totally internally reflecting along until
it may be exited by a diffraction pattern to come out of the waveguide as a set of beams.
Depending upon the diffraction configuration, the beams may come out el/collimated (as
shown in Figure 21| for convenience), or in a ing fan configuration if representing a focal
distance closer than l ty.
The depicted set of parallel exiting beams may represent, for example, the farthest
left pixel of what the user is seeing in the real world as viewed through the waveguide, and light
off to the ost extreme will be a different group of parallel exiting beams. lndeed, with
modular control of the DOE subsections as described above, one may spend more computing
resource or time creating and manipulating the small subset of beams that is likely to be
actively addressing the user’s pupil (i.e., because the other beams never reach the user’s eye
and are effectively wasted). Thus, referring to Figure 21J, a waveguide (738) configuration is
shown wherein only the two subsections (740, 742) of the DOE (744) are deemed to be likely to
address the user’s pupil (45) are activated. Preferably one subsection may be ured to
direct light in one direction aneously as another subsection is directing light in a different
direction.
] Figure 21 K shows an orthogonal view of two independently controlled subsections
(734, 746) of a DOE (732). Referring to the top view of Figure 21L, such independent control
may be used for scanning or focusing light. In the uration depicted in Figure 21K, an
ly (748) of three independently controlled DOE/waveguide subsections (750, 752, 754)
may be used to scan, increase the field of view, and/or increase the exit pupil region. Such
functionality may arise from a single waveguide with such independently controllable DOE
subsections, or a vertical stack of these for additional complexity.
] In one embodiment, if a circular DOE may be controllably stretched radially-
symmetrically, the diffraction pitch may be modulated, and the DOE may be utilized as a
tunable lens with an analog type of control. In another embodiment, a single axis of stretch (for
example, to adjust an angle of a linear DOE term) may be utilized for DOE control. Further, in
another embodiment a membrane, akin to a drum head, may be vibrated, with oscillatory
motion in the Z-axis (i.e., toward/away from the eye) providing Z-axis control and focus change
over time.
Referring to Figure 21 M, a stack of several DOEs (756) is shown receiving
collimated light from a waveguide (722) and refocusing it based upon the additive powers of the
activated DOEs. Linear and/or radial terms of DOEs may be modulated over time, such as on
a frame sequential basis, to produce a variety of treatments (such as tiled display
configurations or expanded field of view) for the light coming from the ide and exiting,
preferably toward the user’s eye. In urations wherein the DOE or DOEs are embedded
within the waveguide, a low diffraction efficiency is desired to maximize transparency for light
passed from the real world; in configurations wherein the DOE or DOEs are not embedded, a
high diffraction ency may be desired, as described above. In one embodiment, both linear
and radial DOE terms may be combined e of the waveguide, in which case high
diffraction efficiency would be desired.
] Referring to Figure 21 N, a segmented or parabolic reflector, such as those
sed above in Figure SQ, is shown. Rather than executing a segmented reflector by
combining a plurality of smaller reflectors, in one embodiment the same functionality may result
from a single waveguide with a DOE having different phase profiles for each section of it, such
that it is llable by subsection. In other words, while the entire segmented tor
functionality may be turned on or off together, lly the DOE may be configured to direct
light toward the same region in space (i.e., the pupil of the user).
Referring to Figures 22A—22Z, optical configurations known as “freeform optics” may
be utilized n of the aforementioned challenges. The term “freeform” generally is used in
reference to arily curved surfaces that may be utilized in situations wherein a cal,
parabolic, or cylindrical lens does not meet a design complexity such as a geometric constraint.
For example, referring to Figure 22A, one of the common challenges with display (762)
configurations when a user is looking through a mirror (and also sometimes a lens 760) is that
the field of view is limited by the area subtended by the final lens (760) of the system.
Referring to Figure 228, in more simple terms, if one has a display (762), which
may include some lens elements, there is a straightforward geometric relationship such that the
field of view cannot be larger than the angle subtended by the display (762). Referring to
Figure 22C, this challenge is exacerbated if the user is trying to have an augmented reality
experience wherein light from the real world is also be to passed through the optical ,
because in such case, there often is a reflector (764) that leads to a lens (760); by interposing
a reflector, the overall path length to get to the lens from the eye is increased, which tightens
the angle and reduces the field of view.
Given this, if one wants to se the field of view, he must increase the size of the
lens, but that might mean pushing a physical lens toward the ad of the user from an
ergonomic perspective. Further, the reflector may not catch all of the light from the larger lens.
Thus, there is a practical limitation imposed by human head geometry, and it generally is a
challenge to get more than a 40-degree field of view using conventional see-through displays
and .
With rm lenses, rather than having a standard planar reflector as described
above, one has a combined reflector and lens with power (Le, a curved reflector 766), which
means that the curved lens geometry ines the field of view. Referring to Figure 22D,
without the circuitous path length of a conventional paradigm as described above in nce
to Figure 22C, it is possible for a freeform arrangement to realize a significantly larger field of
view for a given set of optical requirements.
Referring to Figure 22E, a l freeform optic has three active surfaces. Referring
to Figure 22E, in one l freeform optic (770) configuration, light may be directed toward the
freeform optic from an image plane, such as a flat panel display (768), into the first active
e (772), which typically is a primarily transmissive freeform surface that refracts
transmitted light and imparts a focal change (such as an added stigmatism, e the final
bounce from the third surface will add a matching/opposite stigmatism and these are desirably
canceled). The incoming light may be directed from the first surface to a second surface (774),
wherein it may strike with an angle shallow enough to cause the light to be reflected under total
internal reflection toward the third surface (776).
The third surface may comprise a half-silvered, arily-curved surface configured
to bounce the light out through the second surface toward the eye, as shown in Figure 22E.
Thus in the depicted typical freeform configuration, the light enters through the first surface,
bounces from the second surface, bounces from the third surface, and is directed out of the
second surface. Due to the optimization of the second e to have the requisite reflective
properties on the first pass, as well as refractive properties on the second pass as the light is
exited toward the eye, a variety of curved surfaces with higher-order shapes than a simple
sphere or parabola are formed into the freeform optic.
Referring to Figure 22F, a compensating lens (780) may be added to the freeform
optic (770) such that the total thickness of the optic assembly is substantially m in
thickness, and preferably without magnification, to light incoming from the real world (144) in an
augmented reality configuration.
Referring to Figure 22G, a freeform optic (770) may be combined with a waveguide
(778) configured to facilitate total internal reflection of captured light within certain constraints.
For example, as shown in Figure 22G, light may be directed into the freeform/waveguide
assembly from an image plane, such as a flat panel display, and totally internally reflected
within the waveguide until it hits the curved freeform surface and escapes toward the eye of the
user. Thus the light s l times in total internal reflection until it reaches the
freeform wedge portion.
One of the main objectives with such an assembly is to try to lengthen the optic
assembly while retaining as uniform a ess as possible (to facilitate ort by total
internal reflection, and also viewing of the world through the assembly without further
compensation) for a larger field of view. Figure 22H depicts a configuration similar to that of
Figure 22G, with the ion that the configuration of Figure 22H also features a
compensating lens portion to further extend the thickness mity and assist with viewing the
world through the assembly without further compensation.
Referring to Figure 22l, in another embodiment, a freeform optic (782) is shown with
a small flat surface, or fourth face (784), at the lower left corner that is configured to facilitate
injection of image information at a different location than is typically used with rm optics.
The input device (786) may comprise, for e, a scanning fiber display, which may be
ed to have a very small output geometry. The fourth face may comprise various
geometries itself and have its own refractive power, such as by use planar or rm surface
geometries.
Referring to Figure 22J, in practice, such a configuration may also feature a
reflective coating (788) along the first surface such that it directs light back to the second
surface, which then bounces the light to the third surface, which directs the light out across the
second surface and to the eye (58). The addition of the fourth small surface for injection of the
image information tates a more compact configuration. In an embodiment wherein a
classical freeform input configuration and a scanning fiber display (790) are utilized, some
lenses (792, 794) may be required in order to appropriately form an image plane (796) using
the output from the scanning fiber y; these hardware components add extra bulk that
may not be desired.
Referring to Figure 22K, an embodiment is shown n light from a scanning
fiber display (790) is passed through an input optics assembly (792, 794) to an image plane
(796), and then directed across the first surface of the freeform optic (770) to a total internal
reflection bounce off of the second surface, then another total al tion bounce from
the third surface results in the light exiting across the second surface and being directed toward
the eye (58).
An all-total-internal-reflection freeform waveguide may be created such that there
are no reflective coatings (i.e., such that total-internal-reflection is being relied upon for
propagation of light until a critical angle of incidence with a surface is met, at which point the
light exits in a manner akin to the wedge-shaped optics described above). In other words,
rather than having two planar es, one may have a surface comprising one or more sub-
surfaces from a set of conical curves, such as parabolas, s, es, etc.).
Such a configuration still may produce a shallow-enough angles for total internal
reflection within the optic; thus an approach that is somewhat a hybrid n a conventional
freeform optic and a wedge-shaped waveguide is presented. One motivation to have such a
configuration is to get away from the use of reflective coatings, which do help product reflection,
but also are known to prevent transmission of a relatively large portion (such as 50%) of the
light transmitting through from the real world (144). Further, such coatings also may block an
equivalent amount of the light coming into the freeform optic from the input device. Thus there
are reasons to develop designs that do not have reflective coatings.
] As described above, one of the surfaces of a conventional freeform optic may
comprise a half-silvered reflective surface. Generally such a reflective surface will be of
“neutral density”, meaning that it will generally reflect all wavelengths similarly. In another
embodiment, such as one wherein a scanning fiber display is utilized as an input, the
conventional reflector paradigm may be replaced with a narrow band reflector that is
wavelength sensitive, such as a thin film ine tor. Thus in one embodiment, a
configuration may reflect particular red/green/blue wavelength ranges and remain passive to
other wavelengths, which generally will increase transparency of the optic and therefore be
preferred for ted reality configurations wherein transmission of image ation from
the real world (144) across the optic also is valued.
Referring to Figure 22L, an embodiment is depicted wherein multiple freeform optics
(770) may be stacked in the Z axis (i.e., along an axis substantially aligned with the optical axis
of the eye). In one variation, each of the three depicted freeform optics may have a
wavelength-selective coating (for example, one highly selective for blue, the next for green, the
next for red) so that images may be injected into each to have blue reflected from one surface,
green from another, and red from a third surface. Such a uration may be utilized, for
example, to address tic aberration issues, to create a lightfield, or to increase the
functional exit pupil size.
Referring to Figure 22M, an embodiment is shown wherein a single freeform optic
(798) has multiple reflective surfaces (800, 802, 804), each of which may be ngth or
polarization selective so that their reflective properties may be individually controlled.
Referring to Figure 22N, in one embodiment, multiple microdisplays, such as
ng light displays, (786) may be injected into a single freeform optic to tile images (thereby
providing an sed field of view), increase the functional pupil size, or address nges
such as chromatic aberration (i.e., by ting one wavelength per display). Each of the
ed displays would inject light that would take a different path h the freeform optic
due to the ent positioning of the displays relative to the freeform optic, which would provide
a larger functional exit pupil output.
] In one embodiment, a packet or bundle of scanning fiber displays may be utilized as
an input to overcome one of the challenges in operatively coupling a scanning fiber display to a
rm optic. One such challenge with a scanning fiber display configuration is that the output
of an individual fiber is emitted with a certain numerical aperture, or “NA”, which is like the
projectional angle of light from the fiber; ultimately this angle determines the diameter of the
beam that passes through various optics, and tely determines the exit functional exit pupil
size; thus in order to maximize exit pupil size with a freeform optic configuration, one may
either increase the NA of the fiber using optimized refractive relationships, such as between
core and cladding, or one may place a lens (Le, a refractive lens, such as a gradient refractive
index lens, or “GRIN” lens) at the end of the fiber or build one into the end of the fiber as
described above, or create an array of fibers that is feeding into the freeform optic, in which
case all of those NAs in the bundle remain small, and at the exit pupil an array of small exit
pupils is ed that in the aggregate forms the functional equivalent of a large exit pupil.
Alternatively, in another embodiment a more sparse array (i.e., not bundled tightly as
a packet) of scanning fiber displays or other ys may be utilized to functionally increase the
field of view of the virtual image through the freeform optic. Referring to Figure 220, in another
embodiment, a plurality of displays or displays (786) may be injected through the top of a
freeform optic (770), as well as another ity (786) through the lower ; the display
arrays may be two or three dimensional arrays. Referring to Figure 22P, in another related
embodiment, image information also may be injected in from the side (806) of the freeform optic
(770) as well.
In an embodiment wherein a plurality of r exit pupils is to be aggregated into a
functionally larger exit pupil, one may elect to have each of the ng fibers monochromatic,
such that within a given bundle or plurality of projectors or displays, one may have a subgroup
of solely red fibers, a subgroup of solely blue fibers, and a subgroup of solely green fibers.
Such a configuration tates more efficiency in output coupling for bringing light into the
optical fibers; for instance, there would be no need in such an embodiment to superimpose
red, green, and blue into the same band.
Referring to Figures 22Q-22V, various freeform optic tiling configurations are
depicted. Referring to Figure 22Q, an ment is depicted wherein two freeform optics are
tiled side-by-side and a microdisplay, such as a scanning light display, (786) on each side is
configured to inject image information from each side, such that one freeform optic wedge
represents each half of the field of view.
Referring to Figure 22R, a sator lens (808) may be included to facilitate
views of the real world through the optics assembly. Figure 228 illustrates a configuration
wherein freeform optics wedges are tiled side by side to increase the functional field of view
while keeping the thickness of such optical assembly relatively uniform.
Referring to Figure 22T, a haped assembly comprises a plurality of freeform
optics wedges (also shown with a plurality of displays for inputting image information) in a
configuration that may provide a larger field of view expansion while also maintaining a
vely thin overall optics assembly thickness.
With a tiled freeform optics assembly, the optics elements may be aggregated to
produce a larger field of view; the tiling configurations bed above have addressed this
notion. For example, in a uration wherein two rm waveguides are aimed at the eye
such as that depicted in Figure 22R, there are several ways to increase the field of view. One
option is to “toe in” the freeform waveguides such that their outputs share, or are superimposed
in, the space of the pupil (for example, the user may see the left half of the visual field through
the left freeform waveguide, and the right half of the visual field through the right freeform
waveguide).
With such a configuration, the field of view has been increased with the tiled
freeform waveguides, but the exit pupil has not grown in size. Alternatively, the freeform
waveguides may be oriented such that they do not toe in as much — so they create exit pupils
that are side-by—side at the eye’s anatomical pupil. In one e, the anatomical pupil may
be 8mm wide, and each of the side-by—side exit pupils may be 8mm, such that the functional
exit pupil is expanded by about two times. Thus such a configuration provides an enlarged exit
pupil, but if the eye is moved around in the “eyebox” defined by that exit pupil, that eye may
lose parts of the visual field (i.e., lose either a portion of the left or right incoming light because
of the side-by—side nature of such configuration).
In one embodiment using such an approach for tiling freeform optics, especially in
the Z-axis relative to the eye of the user, red wavelengths may be driven through one freeform
optic, green through another, and blue through another, such red/green/blue chromatic
tion may be sed. le freeform optics also may be provided to such a
configuration that are stacked up, each of which is configured to address a particular
wavelength.
Referring to Figure 22U, two oppositely-oriented freeform optics are shown d
in the Z-axis (i.e., they are upside down relative to each other). With such a configuration, a
compensating lens may not be required to facilitate te views of the world through the
assembly; in other words, rather than having a compensating lens such as in the embodiment
of Figure 22F or Figure 22R, an additional freeform optic may be utilized, which may r
assist in routing light to the eye. Figure 22V shows r similar configuration wherein the
assembly of two freeform optics is presented as a vertical stack.
To ensure that one surface is not interfering with another surface in the freeform
optics, one may use wavelength or polarization selective reflector surfaces. For example,
referring to Figure 22V, red, green, and blue wavelengths in the form of 650nm, 530nm, and
450nm may be injected, as well as red, green, and blue wavelengths in the form of 620nm,
550nm, and 470nm; different selective tors may be utilized in each of the freeform optics
so that they do not interfere with each other. In a configuration wherein polarization ing is
used for a similar purpose, the reflection/transmission selectivity for light that is polarized in a
particular axis may be varied (i.e., the images may be pre-polarized before they are sent to
each freeform waveguide, to work with reflector selectivity).
Referring to Figures 22W and 22X, configurations are illustrated wherein a plurality
of freeform waveguides may be ed together in series. ing to Figure 22W, light may
enter from the real world and be directed sequentially through a first freeform optic (770),
through an optional lens (812) which may be configured to relay light to a tor (810) such
as a DMD from a DLP system, which may be configured to reflect the light that has been
filtered on a pixel by pixel basis (i.e., an occlusion mask may be ed to block out certain
elements of the real world, such as for darkfield perception, as described above; suitable
spatial light modulators may be used which comprise DMDs, LCDs, ferroelectric LCOSs,
MEMS shutter arrays, and the like, as described above) to another rm optic (770) that is
relaying light to the eye (28) of the user. Such a uration may be more compact than one
using conventional lenses for spatial light modulation.
Referring to Figure 22X, in a scenario wherein it is very important to keep overall
thickness minimized, a configuration may be utilized that has one surface that is highly-
reflective so that it may bounce light straight into another compactly positioned freeform optic.
In one embodiment a selective attenuator (814) may be interposed between the two freeform
optics (770).
Referring to Figure 22Y, an embodiment is depicted wherein a freeform optic (770)
may se one aspect of a contact lens system. A miniaturized freeform optic is shown
d against the cornea of a user’s eye (58) with a urized sator lens portion
(780), akin to that described in reference to Figure 22F. Signals may be injected into the
urized freeform assembly using a tethered scanning fiber display which may, for example,
be coupled between the rm optic and a tear duct area of the user, or between the
freeform optic and another head-mounted display configuration.
Various example embodiments of the invention are described herein. Reference is
made to these examples in a non-limiting sense. They are provided to illustrate more broadly
applicable aspects of the ion. Various changes may be made to the invention bed
and equivalents may be substituted without departing from the true spirit and scope of the
invention. In addition, many modifications may be made to adapt a particular situation, material,
ition of matter, process, s act(s) or step(s) to the objective(s), spirit or scope of
the present invention. Further, as will be appreciated by those with skill in the art that each of
the individual variations described and illustrated herein has discrete components and features
which may be readily separated from or ed with the features of any of the other several
embodiments without departing from the scope or spirit of the present inventions. All such
modifications are ed to be within the scope of claims associated with this disclosure.
The invention includes methods that may be performed using the subject devices.
The methods may comprise the act of providing such a suitable device. Such provision may be
performed by the end user. In other words, the "providing" act merely requires the end user
obtain, access, approach, position, set-up, activate, power-up or otherwise act to provide the
requisite device in the subject method. Methods recited herein may be carried out in any order
of the recited events which is logically possible, as well as in the recited order of .
Example aspects of the invention, together with details regarding material selection
and manufacture have been set forth above. As for other details of the present invention, these
may be iated in connection with the above-referenced patents and publications as well
as generally known or appreciated by those with skill in the art. The same may hold true with
respect to method-based aspects of the invention in terms of additional acts as commonly or
logically employed.
In addition, though the invention has been described in reference to several
examples optionally incorporating various features, the invention is not to be limited to that
which is described or indicated as contemplated with respect to each variation of the invention.
Various changes may be made to the invention described and equivalents (whether recited
herein or not included for the sake of some brevity) may be substituted without departing from
the true spirit and scope of the invention. In addition, where a range of values is ed, it is
understood that every intervening value, between the upper and lower limit of that range and
any other stated or intervening value in that stated range, is encompassed within the invention.
] Also, it is contemplated that any optional feature of the inventive variations
described may be set forth and claimed ndently, or in combination with any one or more
of the es described herein. Reference to a singular item, includes the possibility that there
are plural of the same items present. More ically, as used herein and in claims associated
hereto, the arforms "a, an," "said," and "the" include plural referents unless the
specifically stated ise. In other words, use of the articles allow for "at least one" of the
subject item in the description above as well as claims associated with this disclosure. It is
further noted that such claims may be drafted to exclude any optional t. As such, this
statement is ed to serve as antecedent basis for use of such exclusive terminology as
"solely," "only" and the like in connection with the recitation of claim ts, or use of a
"negative" limitation.
Without the use of such exclusive terminology, the term "comprising" in claims
associated with this disclosure shall allow for the inclusion of any additional element--
irrespective of whether a given number of elements are enumerated in such claims, or the
addition of a feature could be ed as transforming the nature of an element set forth in
such claims. Except as specifically defined herein, all technical and scientific terms used herein
are to be given as broad a commonly understood g as possible while maintaining claim
validity.
The breadth of the present invention is not to be limited to the examples provided
and/or the subject specification, but rather only by the scope of claim language associated with
this disclosure.
Claims (27)
1. A system for displaying content to a user, comprising: a light source configured to t light associated with at least first and second frames of image data; a waveguide assembly configured to relay the ted light s at least one eye of a user with a wavefront curvature for a focus level corresponding to a focal distance for the respective first or second frame of image data; and wherein the waveguide assembly comprises; a first planar waveguide component operatively coupled to a first weak lens to modify first light associated with the first frame of image data after the first light exits from the first planar waveguide component such that the first light is perceived as coming from a first focal plane, and a second planar waveguide component operatively coupled to both the first lens and a second lens to modify second light associated with the second frame of image data after the second light exits from the second planar waveguide component such that the second light is perceived as coming from a second focal plane different from the first focal plane, wherein the first planar waveguide component and the second planar waveguide component sandwich the first lens, wherein the first lens and the second lens sandwich the second planar waveguide ent, and wherein the first and second planar waveguide components and the first and second lenses are stacked along a z-axis in front of the at least one eye of the user.
2. The system of claim 1, wherein the first lens is a refractive lens.
3. The system of claim 1, wherein the first lens is a diffractive lens.
4. The system of claim 1, wherein the first lens is a weak lens.
5. The system of claim 4, further comprising a compensating lens optically coupled to the first lens.
6. The system of claim 5, wherein the compensating lens has a first optical power and the first lens has a second l power, the first l power equal to a negative of the second optical power.
7. The system of claim 5, wherein the first weak lens and the compensating lens is a variable focus lens element.
8. The system of claim 1, wherein the second lens is a refractive lens.
9. The system of claim 1, wherein the second lens is a diffractive lens.
10. The system of claim 1, wherein the second lens is a weak lens.
11. The system of claim 1, further comprising a compensating lens optically coupled to the ide assembly.
12. The system of claim 1, wherein the sating lens has a first optical power, the first lens has a second optical power, and the second lens has a third optical power, the first optical power equal to a negative sum of the second optical power and third optical powers.
13. The system of claim 12, wherein the first lens, the second lens, and the compensating lens is a variable focus element.
14. The system of claim 1, n the waveguide assembly comprises a diffractive optical element (DOE).
15. The system of claim 14, wherein the DOE is switchable between an on and off state.
16. The system of claim 1, wherein at least one of the first or second waveguide component comprises lithium niobate.
17. The system of claim 1, wherein the waveguide ly comprises a Fresnel zone plate.
18. The system of claim 1, n the first frame and the second frame are red to the at least one eye of the user simultaneously.
19. The system of claim 1, wherein the first frame and the second frame of image data are delivered to the at least one eye of the user sequentially.
20. The system of claim 1, further comprising a plurality of angled reflectors configured to deliver light to the at least one eye of the user, wherein the first planar waveguide component and the second planar waveguide component direct light to the plurality of angled reflectors.
21. The system of claim 20, wherein the plurality of angled reflectors comprise lithium niobate.
22. The system of claim 1, wherein at least one of the first or second planar waveguide components have an optical power of zero diopters.
23. The system of claim 1, n each of the first and second planar waveguide components are configured to propagate first or second light across a length of the respective first or second planar waveguide component in a direction onal to the z-axis.
24. The system of claim 23, wherein the propagation is by total internal reflection.
25. The system of claim 24, wherein each of the first and second planar waveguide component outcouple a sampled plurality of exit pupils distributed across the length of the respective first or second planar waveguide components towards the eye of the user.
26. The system of claim 25, wherein the sampled plurality of exit pupils from a respective first or second planar ide component are associated with the first or second light.
27. The system of claim 1, n the first lens modifies the second light associated with the second frame of image data after the second light passes through the second lens.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
NZ758961A NZ758961B2 (en) | 2013-11-27 | 2014-11-27 | Virtual and augmented reality systems and methods |
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US201361909774P | 2013-11-27 | 2013-11-27 | |
US61/909,774 | 2013-11-27 | ||
NZ720610A NZ720610A (en) | 2013-11-27 | 2014-11-27 | Virtual and augmented reality systems and methods |
Publications (2)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
NZ755273A NZ755273A (en) | 2021-04-30 |
NZ755273B2 true NZ755273B2 (en) | 2021-08-03 |
Family
ID=
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
AU2022246404B2 (en) | Virtual and augmented reality systems and methods | |
NZ755273B2 (en) | Virtual and augmented reality systems and methods | |
NZ755266B2 (en) | Virtual and augmented reality systems and methods | |
NZ758961B2 (en) | Virtual and augmented reality systems and methods | |
NZ758961A (en) | Virtual and augmented reality systems and methods | |
NZ755269B2 (en) | Virtual and augmented reality systems and methods |